Panasonic Cordless Telephone kx tgp500 User Manual

Administrator Guide  
SIP Cordless Phone  
Model No.  
KX-TGP500  
KX-TGP550  
Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic product.  
Please read this guide before using the unit and save it for future reference.  
Document Version: 2010.03.15  
Table of Contents  
Table of Contents  
1.1  
1.1.1  
1.1.2  
1.1.3  
1.1.4  
1.1.5  
1.1.5.1  
1.1.5.2  
1.1.5.3  
1.1.5.4  
1.1.6  
1.1.6.1  
1.1.6.2  
1.1.6.3  
1.1.6.4  
1.1.6.5  
1.1.6.6  
1.1.7  
1.1.7.1  
1.1.7.2  
1.1.8  
1.1.8.1  
1.1.9  
1.1.10  
1.1.10.1  
1.1.10.2  
1.1.10.3  
1.2  
1.2.1  
1.2.1.1  
1.2.1.2  
1.2.2  
2.1  
2.1.1  
2.1.2  
2.1.3  
2.1.4  
2.1.5  
2.1.6  
3.1  
3.2  
3.2.1  
3.2.2  
3.3  
3.3.1  
3.3.1.1  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
3
Table of Contents  
3.3.2  
3.3.2.1  
3.3.3  
3.3.3.1  
3.4  
3.4.1  
3.4.1.1  
3.4.1.2  
3.4.1.3  
3.4.2  
3.4.2.1  
3.4.2.2  
3.4.3  
3.4.3.1  
3.4.3.2  
3.4.4  
3.4.4.1  
4
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Table of Contents  
3.4.4.2  
3.4.5  
3.4.5.1  
3.4.5.2  
3.4.5.3  
3.5  
3.5.1  
3.5.1.1  
3.5.2  
3.5.2.1  
3.5.3  
3.5.3.1  
3.5.4  
3.5.4.1  
3.5.5  
3.5.5.1  
3.5.5.2  
3.5.5.3  
3.5.5.4  
3.5.5.5  
3.5.5.6  
3.6  
3.6.1  
3.6.1.1  
3.6.1.2  
3.6.2  
3.6.2.1  
3.6.2.2  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
5
Table of Contents  
3.6.2.3  
3.6.2.4  
3.6.2.5  
3.6.2.6  
3.6.2.7  
3.6.2.8  
3.6.2.9  
3.6.2.10  
3.6.2.11  
3.6.2.12  
3.6.3  
3.6.3.1  
3.6.4  
3.6.4.1  
3.6.4.2  
3.6.4.3  
3.6.4.4  
3.6.4.5  
3.6.4.6  
6
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Table of Contents  
3.7  
3.7.1  
3.7.1.1  
3.7.1.2  
3.7.2  
3.7.2.1  
3.7.2.2  
3.7.2.3  
3.7.3  
3.7.3.1  
3.7.3.2  
3.7.3.3  
3.7.3.4  
3.7.4  
3.7.4.1  
3.7.4.2  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
7
Table of Contents  
3.7.4.3  
3.7.4.4  
3.7.4.5  
3.7.4.6  
3.7.5  
3.7.5.1  
3.7.6  
3.7.6.1  
3.8  
3.8.1  
3.8.1.1  
3.8.2  
3.8.2.1  
3.8.3  
3.8.3.1  
3.8.4  
3.8.5  
4.1  
4.2  
4.2.1  
4.2.2  
4.2.3  
4.3  
4.3.1  
4.3.2  
8
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Table of Contents  
4.3.3  
4.3.4  
4.3.5  
4.4  
4.4.1  
4.4.2  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
9
Table of Contents  
4.4.3  
4.4.4  
4.4.5  
4.4.6  
4.4.7  
4.5  
4.5.1  
4.5.2  
4.6  
4.6.1  
10  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Table of Contents  
4.6.2  
4.6.3  
4.7  
4.7.1  
4.7.2  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
11  
Table of Contents  
5.1  
5.1.1  
5.2  
5.2.1  
5.2.2  
5.2.3  
5.3  
5.3.1  
6.1  
6.2  
6.3  
6.4  
7.1  
8.1  
8.2  
8.2.1  
8.3  
12  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Section 1  
Initial Setup  
This section provides an overview of the setup  
procedures for the unit.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
13  
 
1.1.3 Basic Network Setup  
1.1 Setup  
1.1.1 Factory Defaults  
Many of the settings for this unit have been configured before the unit ships.  
Where possible, these settings are configured with the optimum or most common values for the setting. For  
example, the port number of the SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) server is set to "5060".  
However, many of the settings, such as the address of the SIP server or the phone number, have not been  
pre-configured, and they must be modified depending on the usage environment. If the port number of the SIP  
server is not "5060", the value of this setting must be changed.  
This unit thus will not function properly using only the factory default settings. The settings for each feature  
must be configured according to the environment in which the unit is used.  
1.1.2 Language Selection for the Unit  
You can change the language used on the LCD. Because the language settings for the LCD of the base unit  
and handsets are not synchronized, you must set the languages individually for the base unit and each handset.  
In addition, various settings can be configured by using the Web user interface on a PC connected on the same  
network (® see Section 3 Web User Interface Programming). You can select the language for the Web  
user interface. You must set the language setting for the Web user interface separately from that of the base  
unit and handsets.  
The available languages may differ depending on the country/area of use.  
Note  
To select the display language for the base unit or handsets, refer to the User Guide on the Panasonic  
Web site (® see Introduction).  
To select the display language for the Web user interface, see 3.5.1 Web Language.  
1.1.3 Basic Network Setup  
This section describes the basic network settings that you must configure before you can use the unit on your  
network.  
You must configure the following network settings:  
TCP/IP settings (DHCP [Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol] or static IP address assignment)  
DNS server settings  
TCP/IP Settings (DHCP or Static IP Address Assignment)  
A unique IP address must be assigned to the unit so that it can communicate on the network. How you assign  
an IP address depends on your network environment. This unit supports the following 2 methods for assigning  
an IP address:  
Obtaining an IP Address Automatically from a DHCP Server  
You can configure the unit to automatically obtain its IP address when it starts up from a DHCP server running  
on your network. With this method, the system can efficiently manage a limited number of IP addresses. Note  
that the IP address assigned to the unit may vary every time the unit is started up.  
For details about the DHCP server, consult your network administrator.  
14  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
                 
1.1.3 Basic Network Setup  
Using a Static IP Address Specified by Your Network Administrator  
If IP addresses for network devices are specified individually by your network administrator, you will need to  
manually configure settings such as the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and DNS servers from  
either the base unit or one of the handsets.  
For details about the required network settings, consult your network administrator.  
DNS Server Settings  
You can configure the unit to use 2 DNS servers: a primary DNS server and a secondary DNS server. If you  
set both DNS servers, the primary DNS server receives priority over the secondary DNS server. If the primary  
DNS server returns no reply, the secondary DNS server will be used.  
For details about configuring the DNS server settings using the base unit and handsets, or using the Web user  
interface, see Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit in this section.  
DNS Priority Using Configuration File  
The setting for DNS server(s) may be configured using the configuration files by your phone system dealer  
(® see "DNS1_ADDR" and "DNS2_ADDR" in 4.4.2 DNS Settings).  
If the DNS server addresses specified in the configuration file (® see "DNS_PRIORITY" in 4.4.2 DNS  
Settings) are given priority, the unit first sends its requests to those DNS servers. If a match is not found,  
the unit then sends its request to the DNS servers that were specified by the DHCP server, or the primary/  
secondary DNS servers that were specified on the unit or via the Web user interface.  
If the DNS servers that were specified by the DHCP server, or the primary/secondary DNS servers that  
were specified on the unit or via the Web user interface are given priority, the unit first sends its requests  
to those DNS servers. If a match is not found, the unit then sends its request to the DNS servers that were  
specified using the configuration file.  
Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit  
The following procedures explain how to change the network settings via each interface.  
For details about the individual network settings that can be configured via the base unit and handsets, or using  
the Web user interface, refer to the Quick Guide on the Panasonic Web site (® see Introduction) or see  
Configuring Settings from the Base Unit (KX-TGP550 only)/Handset  
To configure network settings automatically  
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in English alphabet  
1. Base unit: [MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][5][0][0]  
Handset: [MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][5][0][0]  
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "On" for DHCP ® [SAVE]  
3. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Automatic" for DNS ® [SAVE]  
Select "Manual" to enter the addresses for DNS1 (primary DNS server) and, if necessary, DNS2  
(secondary DNS server) manually ® [SAVE]  
4. Base unit: [EXIT]  
Handset: [OFF]  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
15  
             
1.1.3 Basic Network Setup  
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in symbols/pictures  
1. Base unit:  
Handset:  
(middle soft key) ® [#][5][0][0]  
(center of joystick) ® [#][5][0][0]  
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "On" for DHCP ®  
3. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Automatic" for DNS ®  
Select "Manual" to enter the addresses for DNS1 (primary DNS server) and, if necessary, DNS2  
(secondary DNS server) manually ®  
4. Base unit: [  
Handset: [  
]
]
To configure network settings manually  
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in English alphabet  
1. Base unit: [MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][5][0][0]  
Handset: [MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][5][0][0]  
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Off" for DHCP ® [SAVE]  
3. Base unit: [EXIT]  
Handset: [OFF]  
4. Base unit: [MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][5][0][1]  
Handset: [MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][5][0][1]  
5. [ ]/[ ]: Enter the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, DNS1 (primary DNS server), and, if  
necessary, DNS2 (secondary DNS server) ® [SAVE]  
6. Base unit: [EXIT]  
Handset: [OFF]  
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in symbols/pictures  
1. Base unit:  
Handset:  
(middle soft key) ® [#][5][0][0]  
(center of joystick) ® [#][5][0][0]  
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Off" for DHCP ®  
3. Base unit: [  
Handset: [  
]
]
4. Base unit:  
Handset:  
(middle soft key) ® [#][5][0][1]  
(center of joystick) ® [#][5][0][1]  
5. [ ]/[ ]: Enter the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, DNS1 (primary DNS server), and, if  
necessary, DNS2 (secondary DNS server) ®  
6. Base unit: [  
Handset: [  
]
]
Configuring Settings from the Web User Interface  
To configure network settings automatically  
1. Click the [Network] tab, and then click [Basic Network Settings].  
2. Select [DHCP] for [Connection Mode].  
3. Enter a host name in [Host Name].  
4. Select [Receive DNS server address automatically] for [Domain Name Server].  
Select [Use the following settings] for [Domain Name Server] to enter the address for primary and  
secondary DNS servers manually.  
16  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
 
1.1.5 Pre-provisioning  
To configure network settings manually  
1. Click the [Network] tab, and then click [Basic Network Settings].  
2. Select [Static] for [Connection Mode].  
3. Enter an IP address in [Static IP Address].  
4. Enter the subnet mask in [Subnet Mask].  
5. Enter a default gateway address in [Default Gateway].  
6. Enter the address for the primary DNS server in [DNS1].  
7. If necessary, enter the address for the secondary DNS server in [DNS2].  
Note  
If your phone system dealer does not allow you these settings, you cannot change them even though  
the unit shows the setting menu. Contact your phone system dealer for further information.  
If you select "On" for DHCP on the unit, or you select [DHCP] for [Connection Mode] in the Web user  
interface, all the settings concerning static connection will be ignored, even if they have been specified.  
If you select "On" for DHCP and "Automatic" for DNS on the unit, or you select [DHCP] for  
[Connection Mode] and [Receive DNS server address automatically] for [Domain Name  
Server] in the Web user interface, the DNS server settings (DNS1 and DNS2) will be ignored, even if  
they have been specified.  
1.1.4 Overview of Programming  
You can specify various settings beforehand by creating configuration files. This is called "pre-provisioning".  
Once you have created the configuration files, which contain the pre-configured settings, the unit can then  
download the files from a server on the Internet and configure its own settings. This is called "provisioning".  
In addition, you can also configure the settings manually. To configure them manually, use the Web user  
interface on a PC that is connected to the same network as the unit (Web user interface programming), or  
perform setting operations on the unit (phone user interface programming).  
1.1.5 Pre-provisioning  
1.1.5.1 What is Pre-provisioning?  
To perform pre-provisioning, you must set the IP address of a TFTP server to the DHCP server option 66 so  
that the unit can acquire the TFTP server address. When the unit starts up and no configuration has been  
applied, it will automatically acquire the address of the TFTP server and download the configuration file.  
For details about the configuration file, see 1.1.6.3 Configuration File.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
17  
                 
1.1.5 Pre-provisioning  
For details about the settings that can be configured with the configuration files and how to specify the settings,  
Factory  
Phone system dealer  
Preset  
Pre-provisioning  
Pre-provisioning data  
Factory defaults  
Factory defaults  
Pre-provisioning can aid the installation process by allowing phone system dealers to configure beforehand  
the minimum settings required to operate the unit.  
For example, phone system dealers can store on the TFTP server a configuration file that contains only the  
URL of a server where another configuration file is stored. This second configuration file contains settings  
configured specifically for the usage environment of the user. The user will be able to start using the unit by  
just connecting it to the network.  
Pre-provisioning is performed only once after the unit has been shipped. Once any configuration (such as  
pre-provisioning, provisioning, or Web user interface programming) has been applied, pre-provisioning will not  
be performed again.  
Note that the settings configured by pre-provisioning cannot be restored once it has been performed. If you  
want to restore them, consult your phone system dealer.  
Although pre-provisioning is often used to specify the location of the configuration files for provisioning, you  
can configure any of the settings through pre-provisioning. The unit can be made fully operational by configuring  
settings through pre-provisioning.  
1.1.5.2 Pre-provisioning when Setting Static IP Addresses  
To perform pre-provisioning, the unit needs to acquire the TFTP server address from option 66 on a DHCP  
server. Therefore, pre-provisioning cannot be performed if you use static IP addressing on your network. If you  
use static IP addressing and want to perform pre-provisioning, construct a small, separate network and connect  
a DHCP and TFTP server to that network.  
In addition, if option 66 of the DHCP server cannot be set, or if you are unauthorized to change this setting,  
perform pre-provisioning on the separate network, and then connect the unit to the actual network.  
18  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
 
1.1.5 Pre-provisioning  
1.1.5.3 Server for Pre-provisioning  
The DHCP server and TFTP server play important roles in performing pre-provisioning. This section explains  
their purposes, uses, and brief descriptions.  
Server  
Purpose  
Description  
DHCP server  
Used to provide the address  
In option 66 of the DHCP server, specify the IP  
of a TFTP server, set in option address or FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) of  
66 of the DHCP server, to  
units that have not been  
configured yet.  
the TFTP server.  
For details, refer to the documentation for your  
DHCP server.  
Note  
The maximum length of FQDN text is 64  
bytes.  
TFTP server  
Used to store configuration  
The unit will download the configuration file "(model  
files, and is set as the access name).cfg" stored in the root directory of the TFTP  
point for downloading them  
automatically.  
server.  
For example, if the model name is KX-TGP500B01,  
the unit will download the configuration file "/  
KX-TGP500B01.cfg".  
DHCP and TFTP servers may be supplied with your operating system, provided through commercial services,  
and are also distributed freely on the Internet. Use a server setup that best matches your environment.  
When installing and setting up the DHCP server and TFTP server, refer to the documentation supplied with  
the product. For details about connecting servers to the network and managing them, consult your network  
administrator.  
1.1.5.4 Pre-provisioning Setting Example  
This section gives an example of how to perform pre-provisioning.  
Assumptions  
Item  
TFTP server address  
Description/Setting  
192.168.0.130  
/tftproot  
Distribution directory of TFTP server  
Model name of the unit  
KX-TGP500B01  
0080F0123456  
MAC address of the unit  
Provisioning server name (where the  
configuration file used for provisioning is to be  
stored)  
provisioning.example.com  
Distribution directory of the provisioning server /Panasonic  
File name of the configuration file used for  
provisioning  
Config0080F0123456.cfg  
URL of the configuration file used for  
provisioning  
http://provisioning.example.com/Panasonic/  
Config0080F0123456.cfg  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
19  
       
1.1.5 Pre-provisioning  
Prior Settings  
Item  
Description/Setting  
DHCP server option 66  
192.168.0.130  
IP address range assigned by DHCP server  
192.168.0.16 to 192.168.0.63  
KX-TGP500B01.cfg  
File name of the configuration file used for  
pre-provisioning  
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH="http://  
provisioning.example.com/Panasonic/  
Config{MAC}.cfg"  
URL of the configuration file used for  
provisioning that is entered in the configuration  
file  
Note  
"{MAC}" is replaced by the MAC address of the  
unit.  
(e.g., "0080F0123456")  
Stored location of the configuration file on the  
TFTP server  
Configuration file "KX-TGP500B01.cfg" is stored in the  
directory "/tftproot".  
To set up the server for pre-provisioning  
1. Start up the DHCP server and TFTP server, and configure the settings as specified above.  
2. Connect the unit to the network, and turn the power on.  
a. The IP address "192.168.0.16" is assigned to the unit by the DHCP server.  
b. The unit acquires the TFTP server address "192.168.0.130" from the DHCP server using DHCP server  
option 66.  
c. The unit downloads the configuration file for pre-provisioning from the TFTP server:  
tftp://192.168.0.130/KX-TGP500B01.cfg  
d. The URL of the server where the configuration file for provisioning is stored (provisioning server) is set  
to the unit:  
http://provisioning.example.com/Panasonic/Config{MAC}.cfg  
e. When pre-provisioning has completed successfully, the status LED lights in the following order:  
Red ® Green ® Orange ® Red ® …  
3. When the status LED lights as described in step e, turn off the unit’s power.  
When the unit is distributed to end users and started up in real circumstances, provisioning will be  
performed correctly.  
Note  
This example describes the case when only one unit is connected. However, multiple units can be  
configured through the same procedure without changing any settings, because the MAC address is  
specified by the {MAC} macro.  
20  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
 
1.1.6 Provisioning  
1.1.6 Provisioning  
1.1.6.1 What is Provisioning?  
After pre-provisioning has been performed (® see 1.1.5 Pre-provisioning), you can set up the unit  
automatically by downloading the configuration file stored on the provisioning server into the unit. This is  
called "provisioning".  
Phone system dealer  
End user  
User  
configuration  
Provisioning  
User modified data  
Provisioning data  
Pre-provisioning data  
Factory defaults  
Pre-provisioning data  
Factory defaults  
1.1.6.2 Protocols for Provisioning  
Provisioning can be performed over HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, and TFTP. The protocol you should use differs  
depending on how you will perform provisioning. Normally, HTTP, HTTPS, or FTP is used for provisioning. If  
you are transmitting encrypted configuration files, it is recommended that you use HTTP. If you are transmitting  
unencrypted configuration files, it is recommended that you use HTTPS. You may not be able to use FTP  
depending on the conditions of the network router or the network to be used.  
1.1.6.3 Configuration File  
This section gives concrete examples of the functions of the configuration file and how to manage it.  
The configuration file is a text file that contains the various settings that are necessary for operating the unit.  
The files are normally stored on a server maintained by your phone system dealer, and will be downloaded to  
the units as required. All configurable settings can be specified in the configuration file. You can ignore settings  
that already have the desired values. Only change parameters as necessary.  
For details about setting parameters and their descriptions, see Section 4 Configuration File  
Using 3 Types of Configuration Files  
The unit can download up to 3 configuration files. One way to take advantage of this is by classifying the  
configuration files into the following 3 types:  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
21  
             
1.1.6 Provisioning  
Type  
Usage  
Master configuration file  
Configure settings that are common to all units, such as the SIP  
server address, and the IP addresses of the DNS and NTP (Network  
Time Protocol) servers managed by your phone system dealer. This  
configuration file is used by all the units.  
Example of the configuration file’s URL:  
http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/ConfigCommon.cfg  
Product configuration file  
Configure settings that are required for a particular model, such as  
the default setting of the privacy mode. This configuration file is used  
by all the units that have the same model name.  
The same number of configuration files as models being used on the  
network are stored on the provisioning server, and units with the  
same model name download the corresponding configuration file.  
Example of the configuration file’s URL:  
http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/Config{MODEL}.cfg  
Note  
When a unit requests the configuration file, "{MODEL}" is  
replaced by the model name of the unit.  
Standard configuration file  
Configure settings that are unique to each unit, such as the phone  
number, user ID, password, etc.  
The same number of configuration files as units are stored on the  
provisioning server, and each unit downloads the corresponding  
standard configuration file.  
Example of the configuration file’s URL:  
http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/Config{MAC}.cfg  
Note  
When a unit requests the configuration file, "{MAC}" is  
replaced by the MAC address of the unit.  
Depending on the situation, you can use all 3 types of configuration files, and can also use only a standard  
configuration file.  
The above example shows only one possible way to use configuration files. Depending on the requirements  
of your phone system dealer, there are a number of ways to use configuration files effectively.  
Using 2 Types of Configuration Files  
The following table shows an example of using 2 types of configuration files: a master configuration file to  
configure settings common to all units, and product configuration files to configure settings common to  
particular groups.  
Using Product Configuration Files According to the Position Groups  
You can use product configuration files for different groups or for multiple users within the same group.  
Department Name  
Sales  
URL of Product Configuration File  
http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/ConfigSales.cfg  
22  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
       
1.1.6 Provisioning  
Department Name  
Planning  
URL of Product Configuration File  
http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/ConfigPlanning.cfg  
1.1.6.4 Downloading Configuration Files  
A unit downloads configuration files when it starts up, at regular intervals, and when directed to do so by the  
server. In addition, you can prohibit units from downloading the configuration files. For details about the  
Download Timing  
Startup  
At regular intervals  
Explanation  
The configuration files are downloaded when the unit starts up.  
The configuration files are downloaded periodically under the following  
conditions:  
In the configuration file:  
Add the line, CFG_CYCLIC="Y".  
Set an interval (minutes) by specifying "CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL".  
In the Web user interface:  
Click the [Maintenance] tab, click [Provisioning Maintenance],  
and then select [Yes] for [Cyclic Auto Resync].  
Enter an interval (minutes) in [Resync Interval].  
Note  
The interval may be determined by your phone system dealer. A  
maximum of 28 days (4 weeks) can be set on the unit.  
If any valid value other than an empty string is specified for  
"CFG_RESYNC_TIME" in 4.3.5 Provisioning Settings in the  
configuration file, the unit downloads the configuration files at the  
fixed time, not at regular intervals.  
When directed  
When a setting needs to be changed immediately, units can be directed to  
download the configuration files by sending them a NOTIFY message that  
includes a special event from the SIP server.  
In the configuration file:  
Specify the special event text in "CFG_RESYNC_FROM_SIP".  
In the Web user interface:  
Click the [Maintenance] tab, click [Provisioning Maintenance],  
and then enter the special event text in [Header Value for Resync  
Event].  
Generally, "check-sync" or "resync" is set as the special event text.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
23  
   
1.1.6 Provisioning  
Download Timing  
None (prohibited)  
Explanation  
If you want to prohibit units from changing their settings by downloading  
configuration files, you can enable this function from the Web user interface.  
The following operations will be prohibited:  
Pre-provisioning  
Provisioning at startup  
Provisioning at regular intervals  
Provisioning by sending a NOTIFY message  
In the configuration file:  
Add the line, PROVISION_ENABLE="N".  
In the Web user interface:  
Click the [Maintenance] tab, click [Provisioning Maintenance],  
and then select [No] for [Enable Provisioning].  
To enable provisioning again, in the Web user interface  
Click the [Maintenance] tab, click [Provisioning Maintenance],  
and then select [Yes] for [Enable Provisioning].  
1.1.6.5 Provisioning Server Setting Example  
This section gives an example of how to set up the units and provisioning server when configuring 2 units with  
configuration files. The standard configuration files and the master configuration file are used in this example.  
Conditions  
Item  
Description/Setting  
Provisioning server FQDN  
Units’ MAC addresses  
prov.example.com  
0080F0111111  
0080F0222222  
URL of the configuration files Configure the following 2 settings either by pre-provisioning or through the  
Web user interface. The values of both settings must be the same.  
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH="http://prov.example.com/  
Panasonic/Config{MAC}.cfg"  
CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH="http://prov.example.com/  
Panasonic/ConfigCommon.cfg"  
Directory on the provisioning  
server containing the  
configuration files  
Create the "Panasonic" directory just under the HTTP root directory of the  
provisioning server.  
File name of configuration  
files  
Store the following configuration files in the "Panasonic" directory.  
Contains the common settings for the 2 units:  
ConfigCommon.cfg  
Contains the settings unique to each unit:  
Config0080F0111111.cfg  
Config0080F0222222.cfg  
To set up the provisioning server  
1. Connect the units to the network, and turn them on.  
a. The unit with the MAC address 0080F0111111 accesses the following URLs:  
http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/ConfigCommon.cfg  
24  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
   
1.1.6 Provisioning  
http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/Config0080F0111111.cfg  
b. The unit with the MAC address 0080F0222222 accesses the following URLs:  
http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/ConfigCommon.cfg  
http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/Config0080F0222222.cfg  
Example Provisioning Direction from the Server  
The following figure shows an example NOTIFY message from the server, directing the units to perform  
provisioning. The text "check-sync" is specified for "CFG_RESYNC_FROM_SIP".  
NOTIFY sip:[email protected] SIP/2.0  
Via: SIP/2.0/UDP xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:5060;branch=abcdef-ghijkl  
From: sip:[email protected]  
Date: Thu, 1 Jan 2009 01:01:01 GMT  
Call-ID: 123456-1234567912345678  
CSeq: 1 NOTIFY  
Contact: sip:xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:5060  
Event: check-sync  
Content-Length: 0  
1.1.6.6 Encryption  
Secure Provisioning Methods  
In order to perform provisioning securely, there are 2 methods for transferring configuration files securely  
between the unit and the server.  
Which method is used depends on the environment and equipment available from the phone system.  
Method 1: Transferring Encrypted Configuration Files  
Unencrypted  
configuration  
file  
Encrypted  
configuration  
file  
CFG_FILE_KEY1  
CFG_FILE_KEY1  
To use this method, an encryption key is required to encrypt and decrypt the configuration files. A preset  
encryption key unique to each unit, an encryption key set by your phone system dealer, etc., is used for the  
encryption. When the unit downloads an encrypted configuration file, it will decrypt the file using the same  
encryption key, and then configure the settings automatically.  
Method 2: Transferring Configuration Files Using HTTPS  
This method uses SSL, which is commonly used on the Internet, to transfer configuration files between the  
unit and server. For more secure communication, you can use a root certificate.  
Notice  
To avoid redundant data transfer over the network, important data, such as the encryption key used  
to encrypt the configuration files and the root certificate for SSL, should be configured through  
pre-provisioning as much as possible.  
It is recommended that you encrypt the data in order to keep the communication secure when  
transferring configuration files.  
However, if you are using the units within a secure environment, such as within an intranet, it is not  
necessary to encrypt the data.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
25  
             
1.1.6 Provisioning  
To decrypt configuration files, the unit uses the encryption key registered to it beforehand. The unit determines  
the encryption status by checking the extension of the downloaded configuration file.  
For details about encrypting configuration files, contact the appropriate person in your organization.  
Extension of Configuration  
Configuration File Parameters Used for Decrypting  
File  
CFG_FILE_KEY1  
CFG_FILE_KEY2  
CFG_FILE_KEY3  
".e1c"  
".e2c"  
".e3c"  
Other than ".e1c", ".e2c", and Processed as unencrypted configuration files.  
".e3c"  
The extension ".cfg" should be used for unencrypted configuration files.  
Comparison of the 2 Methods  
The following table compares the characteristics for the 2 transfer methods.  
Transferring Encrypted  
Configuration Files  
Transferring Configuration Files  
Using HTTPS  
Provisioning server load  
Operation load  
Light  
Heavy  
(The server encrypts data for each  
transmission.)  
Necessary to encrypt data  
beforehand.  
Unnecessary to encrypt data  
beforehand.  
Management of  
configuration files  
Files must be decrypted and  
re-encrypted for maintenance.  
It is easy to manage files because  
they are not encrypted on the server.  
Security of data on the  
server when operating  
High  
Low  
(Configuration files are readable by  
anyone with access to the server.)  
Moreover, there is another method: configuration files are not encrypted while stored on the server, and then,  
using the encryption key registered to the unit beforehand, they are encrypted when they are transferred. This  
method is particularly useful when several units are configured to download a common configuration file using  
different encryption keys. However, as when downloading an unencrypted configuration file using HTTPS, the  
server will be heavily burdened when transferring configuration files.  
26  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
 
1.1.7 Web User Interface Programming  
1.1.7 Web User Interface Programming  
After connecting the unit to your network, you can configure the unit’s settings by accessing the Web user  
interface from a PC connected to the same network. For details, see Section 3 Web User Interface  
Router  
Switching  
Hub  
KX-TGP500  
PC  
KX-TGP550  
1.1.7.1 Password for Web User Interface Programming  
To program the unit via the Web user interface, a login account is required. There are 2 types of accounts, and  
each has different access privileges.  
User: User accounts are for use by end users. Users can change the settings that are specific to the unit.  
Administrator: Administrator accounts are for use by administrators to manage the system configuration.  
Administrators can change all the settings, including the network settings, in addition to the settings that  
can be changed from a User account.  
A separate password is assigned to each account.  
Notice  
You should manage the passwords carefully, and change them regularly.  
1.1.7.2 Changing the Language for Web User Interface Programming  
When accessing the unit via the Web user interface on a PC connected to the same network, various menus  
and settings are displayed. You can change the language used for displaying these setting items. Because  
the language setting for the Web user interface is not synchronized with those of the base unit or handsets,  
you must set the languages for each independently.  
The available languages may differ depending on the country/area of use.  
For details, see 3.5.1 Web Language.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
27  
           
1.1.10 Other Network Settings  
1.1.8 Phone User Interface Programming  
You can change the settings directly from the unit.  
For details about the operations, refer to the User Guide on the Panasonic Web site (® see Introduction).  
For details about additional features available with direct commands, see Section 2 Phone User Interface  
1.1.8.1 Changing the Language for Phone User Interface Programming  
You can change the language used on the LCD. Because the language settings for the LCD of the base unit  
and handsets are not synchronized, you must set the languages individually for the base unit and each handset.  
The available languages may differ depending on the country/area of use.  
For details about changing the setting, refer to the User Guide on the Panasonic Web site (® see  
1.1.9 Priority of Setting Methods  
The same settings can be configured by different configuration methods: provisioning, Web user interface  
programming, etc. This section explains which value is applied when the same setting is specified by multiple  
methods.  
The following table shows the priority with which settings from each method are applied (lower numbers indicate  
higher priority):  
Setting Order  
Priority  
Setting Method  
1
2
4
The factory default settings for the unit  
3
Pre-provisioning with the configuration file  
Provisioning with the master configuration file  
Provisioning with the product configuration file  
Provisioning with the standard configuration file  
2–3  
2–2  
2–1  
3
4
Settings configured from the Web user interface or the phone user  
interface  
1
According to the table, settings configured later override previous settings (i.e., settings listed lower in the table  
have a higher priority).  
If different values are specified for the same setting by the master configuration file and Web user interface  
programming, the value specified from the Web user interface is applied. This is because values specified from  
the Web user interface have a higher priority.  
For settings configured from the Web user interface and the phone user interface, the value specified most  
recently receives priority.  
1.1.10 Other Network Settings  
1.1.10.1 Firewall and Router Setup  
When the unit is connected to a network that is protected by a firewall and/or router, you need to configure the  
firewall and/or router so that they do not block communication from the IP address and port number used by  
the unit.  
28  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
                 
1.1.10 Other Network Settings  
1.1.10.2 NAT (Network Address Translation) Setup  
This section provides information about configuring a router that uses NAT.  
Internet  
Global IP address:  
xxx.yyy.zzz.127  
Router  
Switching  
Hub  
PC  
Private IP address:  
192.168.228.11  
SIP Cordless Phone  
Private IP address:  
192.168.228.12  
If the unit is connected to a network that uses a NAT router and a private IP address is assigned to each  
terminal on the network, depending on your phone system’s setup, you might need to configure the unit and  
router so as to use NAT Traversal techniques.  
If your phone system dealer provides an outbound proxy service that supports NAT Traversal, you need only  
to set the IP address of the SIP outbound proxy server to the unit—no other settings are necessary.  
However, depending on the phone system of the outbound proxy service, no setting may be necessary because  
private IP addresses are automatically translated into global IP addresses by the outbound proxy server.  
For details about the outbound proxy service, consult your phone system dealer.  
When TCP is used to transport the SIP messages, you must always configure the devices for NAT Traversal.  
To configure NAT Traversal, you must have the following information:  
The global IP address of the router.  
The port numbers you will specify for [Source Port] and [External RTP Port] through the Web user  
interface, so that you can configure the appropriate port forwarding settings.  
Note  
Because the IP address of the router needs to be set in the unit, the IP address must be static.  
SIP Setup  
It might be necessary to manually set the router’s global IP address and reception port number in the unit.  
In addition, it might also be necessary to configure the port forwarding settings of the router so that packets  
sent from an outside network are sent to the unit. These settings are required for each individual line. For  
details about Web user interface programming, see 3.4.5 Static NAPT Settings and 3.6.2.5 SIP Source  
Port.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
29  
           
1.1.10 Other Network Settings  
To set the router’s external (global) IP address and reception port number in the unit  
1. In the Web user interface, click the [Network] tab, click [Static NAPT Settings], and then enter the  
router’s global IP address in [Global IP Address].  
2. Select [Yes] for [Enable Global IP Address Usage per Line] for each line.  
Select [No] to disable the setting for the line.  
3. Click the [VoIP] tab, click [SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]], and then enter the router’s source port numbers  
(forwarded port numbers, which are the same as the numbers of the WAN and LAN ports set on the router)  
in [Source Port].  
RTP (Real-time Transport Protocol) Setup  
If the unit is connected to a network that uses a NAT router and a private IP address is assigned to each  
terminal on the network, you must configure the RTP function for the unit and router so that the units can  
perform voice transmission between each other using a peer-to-peer connection.  
However, if your phone system supports the SBC (Session Border Controller) function, it is not necessary to  
configure these settings.  
For details about the SBC function, consult your phone system dealer.  
For details about Web user interface programming, see 3.4.5 Static NAPT Settings.  
To configure the RTP function on the unit  
1. In the Web user interface, click the [Network] tab, click [Static NAPT Settings], and then enter the  
router’s global IP address in [Global IP Address].  
2. In [External RTP Port], enter the router’s source port numbers (forwarded port numbers).  
Note  
Specify a unique value for each of the 3 ports.  
Router Setup  
When configuring the port forwarding function, specify the router’s reception port number as the unit’s port  
number.  
Port forwarding should be configured for the ports specified in [Source Port] (® see SIP Setup in this section)  
and [External RTP Port] (® see RTP (Real-time Transport Protocol) Setup in this section).  
Set the same port number for the source port and destination port, and set the unit’s private IP address as the  
destination address.  
Because the unit’s private IP address will have to be set in the router’s port forwarding configuration again if  
it is changed, set a static IP address to the unit, or configure the router so that the same IP address is always  
assigned to the unit if IP addresses are assigned by a DHCP server.  
For details about how to configure the router, refer to the documentation for the router.  
Because the port forwarding settings depend on the user’s network environment, they cannot be programmed  
using configuration files.  
1.1.10.3 Global Address Detection  
The global IP address is a unique IP address that is assigned to a particular terminal. If the global IP address  
assigned to the firewall or the router is changed, the unit will not be able to communicate.  
If the global IP addresses of these terminals are assigned by a DHCP server in the higher level network where  
they are connected, the IP address may differ each time the unit transmits data.  
The Global Address Detection feature detects the current global IP address and, if the IP address has changed,  
sets it automatically to the SIP server. There are 2 methods, using STUN (Simple Traversal of UDP through  
30  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
             
1.2.1 Reset  
NATs) or SIP messages, to perform this feature. For details about specifying this setting through the Web user  
To set Global Address Detection  
1. In the Web user interface, click the [Network] tab, click [Global Address Detection], and then select  
[STUN] for [Detection Method].  
Select [SIP] for [Detection Method] to perform Global Address Detection by sending SIP messages.  
2. Enter the desired detection interval (seconds) in [Detection Interval].  
When you select [SIP] for [Detection Method], the value "0" disables detection and a value other  
than "0" enables detection.  
3. If you selected [STUN] for [Detection Method], enter the STUN server address (IP address or FQDN) in  
[STUN Server Address].  
4. If you selected [STUN] for [Detection Method], enter the port number used by the STUN server in [STUN  
Server Port].  
Note  
For details about server information, consult your network administrator.  
1.2 Reset and Firmware Update  
1.2.1 Reset  
1.2.1.1 Resetting the Network Settings (IP Reset)  
Performing IP Reset from the phone user interface (® see 2.1.4 IP Reset) restores the basic network settings  
made through phone user interface programming or Web user interface programming to their factory defaults.  
If the unit is unable to connect to the network after changing network settings, you can restore the network  
settings to their factory defaults by performing IP Reset, and then try configuring the settings again. Settings  
such as the phonebook data, are not cleared by this feature.  
The following settings will be reset to their factory defaults:  
DHCP setting (restored to "DHCP on")  
Settings related to static IP addressing (the values for static IP address, subnet mask, default gateway,  
DNS1, and DNS2 are cleared)  
DNS settings for DHCP connection (cleared)  
PHY settings (speed and duplex mode of the either LAN or PC port are restored to "automatic")  
VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) settings (disabled)  
Terminal number settings (restored to "automatic")  
Notice  
After performing IP Reset, the unit will restart automatically. To avoid problems, it is recommended that  
you save your settings before performing IP Reset.  
Note  
If these settings (with the exception of PHY settings and terminal number settings) were made through  
Web user interface programming, the set values made through Web user interface programming  
remain effective, even if you perform IP Reset. To reset these settings to their factory defaults, perform  
Reset Web Settings from the Web user interface again.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
31  
             
1.2.2 Firmware Update  
If these settings (with the exception of PHY settings and terminal number settings) were made through  
configuration file programming, the set values made through configuration file programming remain  
effective, even if you perform Reset Web Settings.  
1.2.1.2 Resetting the Settings Made through the Web User Interface  
(Reset Web Settings)  
Performing Reset Web Settings from the Web user interface (® see 3.8.4 Reset to Defaults) resets the  
settings made through the Web user interface to their default values.  
When you use this feature, the unit will return to the status just after performing the most recent provisioning  
or pre-provisioning.  
Notice  
After performing Reset Web Settings, the base unit will restart automatically. To avoid problems, it is  
recommended that you save your settings before performing Reset Web Settings.  
Note  
The settings configured through the phone user interface only will not be reset. However, settings that  
can be configured through both the phone user interface and Web user interface will be reset.  
1.2.2 Firmware Update  
You can update the unit’s firmware to improve the unit’s operation. You can configure the unit so that it  
automatically downloads the new firmware file from a specified location. The firmware update will be executed  
when the unit is restarted.  
For details, see Section 6 Firmware Update.  
Provisioning server  
Firmware server  
Firmware  
Configuration  
file  
A
C
B
A Download  
B Check for update  
C Firmware download and update  
32  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
         
Section 2  
Phone User Interface Programming  
This section explains how to configure the unit by  
entering direct commands through the phone user  
interface.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
33  
   
2.1.2 Speed/Duplex Settings  
2.1 Phone User Interface Programming  
This section provides information about the features that can be configured directly from the base unit or  
handsets, but that are not mentioned in the User Guide.  
To enter direct commands, use the keys and soft keys on the base unit (KX-TGP550 only) or handset.  
For details about the other available features, settings and key operations on the phone user interface, refer  
to the User Guide on the Panasonic Web site (® see Introduction).  
2.1.1 Phone User Interface Feature List and Direct Commands  
The following table shows additional features programmable with direct commands. These commands are  
hidden from end users.  
Direct  
Command  
Feature  
LAN port  
Ref.  
Speed/Duplex  
[#][5][3][0]  
PC port*1  
VLAN setting*1*2  
Enable VLAN  
IP Phone  
VLAN ID  
Priority  
VLAN ID  
Priority  
PC  
[#][7][3][0]  
[#][7][3][1]  
[#][7][3][9]  
IP Reset*3  
Terminal No.  
Reset Web ID/Password*3  
*1  
*2  
Available for KX-TGP550 only.  
If your phone system dealer does not allow you these settings, you cannot change them even though the unit shows the setting menu.  
Contact your phone system dealer for further information.  
Not displayed on the LCD of the unit.  
*3  
2.1.2 Speed/Duplex Settings  
You can select the connection mode (combination of link speed and duplex mode) of the LAN port and PC  
port (KX-TGP550 only). You can select from the following values:  
Auto(default)  
10M/Full  
10M/Half  
100M/Full  
100M/Half  
For details about configuring the speed/duplex setting from the Web user interface, see 3.4.2.1 Link Speed/  
34  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
                 
2.1.3 VLAN Settings (KX-TGP550 only)  
To set the link speed and duplex mode  
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in English alphabet  
1. Base unit: [MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][5][3][0]  
Handset: [MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][5][3][0]  
For KX-TGP500 users: go to step 4.  
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Speed/Duplex" ® [SELECT]  
3. [ ]/[ ]: Select "LAN port" or "PC port" ® [SELECT]  
4. [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired option ® [SAVE]  
5. Base unit: [EXIT]  
Handset: [OFF]  
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in symbols/pictures  
1. Base unit:  
Handset:  
(middle soft key) ® [#][5][3][0]  
(center of joystick) ® [#][5][3][0]  
For KX-TGP500 users: go to step 4.  
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Speed/Duplex" ®  
3. [ ]/[ ]: Select "LAN port" or "PC port" ®  
4. [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired option ®  
5. Base unit: [  
Handset: [  
]
]
Note  
After you have finished configuring the settings, the base unit will restart automatically once the base  
unit or handset returns to idle.  
For KX-TGP500 users: only the LAN port setting is available because the unit does not have a PC port.  
2.1.3 VLAN Settings (KX-TGP550 only)  
You can change the VLAN settings for the unit and for the PC. The default setting for "Enable VLAN"  
is "No".  
For details about configuring VLAN settings from the Web user interface, see 3.4.2.2 VLAN Settings.  
To enable VLAN settings  
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in English alphabet  
1. Base unit: [MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][5][3][0]  
Handset: [MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][5][3][0]  
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "VLAN setting" ® [SELECT]  
3. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Enable VLAN" ® [SELECT]  
4. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Yes" ® [SAVE]  
Select "No" to disable VLAN settings.  
5. Base unit: [EXIT]  
Handset: [OFF]  
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in symbols/pictures  
1. Base unit:  
Handset:  
(middle soft key) ® [#][5][3][0]  
(center of joystick) ® [#][5][3][0]  
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "VLAN setting" ®  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
35  
       
2.1.4 IP Reset  
3. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Enable VLAN" ®  
4. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Yes" ®  
Select "No" to disable VLAN settings.  
5. Base unit: [  
Handset: [  
]
]
To set VLAN for IP Phone/PC  
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in English alphabet  
1. Base unit: [MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][5][3][0]  
Handset: [MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][5][3][0]  
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "VLAN setting" ® [SELECT]  
3. [ ]/[ ]: Select "IP Phone" or "PC" ® [SELECT]  
4. [ ]/[ ]: Select "VLAN ID" ® [SELECT]  
5. Use the dial keys to enter the VLAN ID (1–4094).  
6. [SAVE]  
7. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Priority" ® [SELECT]  
8. Use the dial keys to enter the priority value (0–7 [7: highest priority]).  
9. [SAVE]  
10. Base unit: [EXIT]  
Handset: [OFF]  
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in symbols/pictures  
1. Base unit:  
Handset:  
(middle soft key) ® [#][5][3][0]  
(center of joystick) ® [#][5][3][0]  
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "VLAN setting" ®  
3. [ ]/[ ]: Select "IP Phone" or "PC" ®  
4. [ ]/[ ]: Select "VLAN ID" ®  
5. Use the dial keys to enter the VLAN ID (1–4094).  
6.  
7. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Priority" ®  
8. Use the dial keys to enter the priority value (0–7 [7: highest priority]).  
9.  
10. Base unit: [  
Handset: [  
]
]
Note  
After you have finished configuring the settings, the base unit will restart automatically once the base  
unit or handset returns to idle.  
2.1.4 IP Reset  
IP Reset returns the basic network settings to their factory defaults. You can perform this operation from the  
base unit or one of the handsets.  
The following settings will be reset to their factory defaults:  
DHCP setting (restored to "DHCP on")  
Settings related to static IP addressing (the values for static IP address, subnet mask, default gateway,  
DNS1, and DNS2 are cleared)  
DNS settings for DHCP connection (cleared)  
36  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
       
2.1.5 Terminal Number Settings  
PHY settings (speed and duplex mode of the either LAN or PC port are restored to "automatic")  
VLAN settings (disabled)  
Terminal number settings (restored to "automatic")  
To perform IP Reset  
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in English alphabet  
1. Base unit: [MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][7][3][0]  
Handset: [MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][7][3][0]  
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Yes" ® [SELECT]  
The settings are returned to their factory defaults, and the base unit will restart.  
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in symbols/pictures  
1. Base unit:  
Handset:  
(middle soft key) ® [#][7][3][0]  
(center of joystick) ® [#][7][3][0]  
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Yes" ®  
The settings are returned to their factory defaults, and the base unit will restart.  
Notice  
Once you press [#][7][3][0], IP Reset is performed immediately and without asking for confirmation,  
regardless of the communication status. As a result, the base unit is disconnected from the IP network  
immediately.  
Note  
If these settings (with the exception of PHY settings and terminal number settings) were made through  
Web user interface programming, the set values made through Web user interface programming  
remain effective, even if you perform IP Reset. To reset these settings to their factory defaults, perform  
Reset Web Settings from the Web user interface again.  
If these settings (with the exception of PHY settings and terminal number settings) were made through  
configuration file programming, the set values made through configuration file programming remain  
effective, even if you perform Reset Web Settings.  
2.1.5 Terminal Number Settings  
You can select the terminal number of the unit that you are using from "Terminal 1"–"Terminal 9",  
and "Auto". The default setting is "Auto". "Auto" does not assign a fixed terminal number to the unit.  
If multiple units try to access the same router simultaneously, errors can occur. Assigning a terminal number  
1 to 9 to each of the units may prevent such errors.  
To assign a terminal number to the unit  
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in English alphabet  
1. Base unit: [MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][7][3][1]  
Handset: [MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][7][3][1]  
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired terminal number ("Auto", "Terminal 1"–"Terminal 9") ® [SAVE]  
3. Base unit: [EXIT]  
Handset: [OFF]  
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in symbols/pictures  
1. Base unit:  
Handset:  
(middle soft key) ® [#][7][3][1]  
(center of joystick) ® [#][7][3][1]  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
37  
   
2.1.6 Reset Web ID/Password  
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired terminal number ("Auto", "Terminal 1"–"Terminal 9") ®  
3. Base unit: [  
Handset: [  
]
]
2.1.6 Reset Web ID/Password  
Reset Web ID/Password resets all the IDs and passwords required for users and administrators to access the  
Interface) to their factory defaults. You can perform this operation from the base unit or one of the handsets.  
To perform Reset Web ID/Password  
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in English alphabet  
1. Base unit: [MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][7][3][9]  
Handset: [MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][7][3][9]  
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Yes" ® [SELECT]  
All the IDs and passwords are reset, and the base unit will restart.  
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in symbols/pictures  
1. Base unit:  
Handset:  
(middle soft key) ® [#][7][3][9]  
(center of joystick) ® [#][7][3][9]  
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Yes" ®  
All the IDs and passwords are reset, and the base unit will restart.  
Notice  
Once you press [#][7][3][9], Reset Web ID/Password is performed immediately and without asking for  
confirmation, regardless of the communication status. As a result, the base unit is disconnected from  
the IP network immediately. For security reasons, it is recommended that the passwords are set again  
38  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
     
Section 3  
Web User Interface Programming  
This section provides information about the settings  
available in the Web user interface.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
39  
   
3.1 Web User Interface Setting List  
3.1 Web User Interface Setting List  
The following tables show all the settings that you can configure from the Web user interface and the access  
levels. For details about each setting, see the reference pages listed.  
Status  
Access  
Level*1  
Menu Item  
Section Title  
Setting  
Ref.  
U
A
Version  
Information  
Version Information  
Model  
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Operating BANK  
IPL Version  
Firmware Version  
MAC Address  
Network Status  
Network Status  
Ethernet Link Status (LAN  
Port)  
Ethernet Link Status (PC Port)  
Connection Mode  
IP Address  
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Subnet Mask  
Default Gateway  
DNS1  
DNS2  
VoIP Status  
VoIP Status  
Line No.  
Phone Number  
VoIP Status  
*1  
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:  
U: User; A: Administrator  
A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level.  
40  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
         
3.1 Web User Interface Setting List  
Network  
Access  
Level*1  
Ref.  
Menu Item  
Section Title  
Setting  
U
A
Basic Network  
Settings  
Connection Mode  
DHCP Settings  
Connection Mode*2  
Host Name*4  
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Domain Name Server*2  
Static IP Address*2  
Subnet Mask*2  
Default Gateway*2  
DNS1*2  
Static Settings  
DNS2*2  
Ethernet Port  
Settings  
Link Speed/Duplex  
Mode  
LAN Port*5  
PC Port*5  
VLAN Settings  
Enable VLAN*2  
IP Phone  
VLAN ID*2  
ü
ü
Priority*2  
PC  
VLAN ID*2  
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Priority*2  
HTTP Client  
Settings  
HTTP Client Settings  
Proxy Server Settings  
HTTP Version*4  
HTTP User Agent*4  
Enable Proxy  
Proxy Server Address  
Proxy Server Port  
Detection Method  
Detection Interval  
STUN Server Address*4  
STUN Server Port*4  
Global Address  
Detection  
Global Address  
Detection  
STUN Server  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
41  
 
3.1 Web User Interface Setting List  
Access  
Level*1  
Menu Item  
Section Title  
Setting  
Ref.  
U
A
Static NAPT  
Settings  
Global IP Address  
Global IP Address  
Line 1–Line 8  
ü
ü
Enable Global IP  
Address Usage per Line  
External RTP Port  
Channel 1–3  
ü
*1  
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:  
U: User; A: Administrator  
A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level.  
This setting can also be configured through other programming methods (phone user interface programming or configuration file  
programming).  
If your phone system dealer does not allow you these settings, you cannot change them even though the unit shows the setting menu.  
Contact your phone system dealer for further information.  
This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming.  
This setting can also be configured through phone user interface programming.  
*2  
*3  
*4  
*5  
System  
Access  
Level*1  
Menu Item  
Section Title  
Setting  
Ref.  
U
A
Web Language  
Web Language  
Language  
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Administrator  
Password  
Change Administrator  
Password  
New Password*2  
Confirm New Password*2  
Change User  
Password  
Change User Password New Password*2  
Confirm New Password*2  
Web Server Port  
Port Close Timer  
ü
ü
Web Server  
Settings  
Web Server Settings  
42  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
           
3.1 Web User Interface Setting List  
Access  
Level*1  
Ref.  
Menu Item  
Section Title  
Setting  
U
A
Time Adjust  
Settings  
Synchronization  
Enable Synchronization by  
NTP  
ü
Synchronization Interval*2  
NTP Server Address*2  
Time Zone*2  
ü
ü
ü
ü
Time Server  
Time Zone  
Daylight Saving Time  
(Summer Time)  
Enable DST (Enable Summer ü*3  
Time)*2  
DST Offset (Summer Time  
Offset)*2  
ü
Start Day and Time of  
DST (Start Day and  
Time of Summer Time)  
Month*2  
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Day of Week*2  
Time*2  
End Day and Time of  
DST (End Day and Time  
of Summer Time)  
Month*2  
Day of Week*2  
Time*2  
*1  
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:  
U: User; A: Administrator  
A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level.  
This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming.  
If your phone system dealer does not allow you these settings, you cannot change them even though the unit shows the setting menu.  
Contact your phone system dealer for further information.  
*2  
*3  
VoIP  
Access  
Level*1  
Menu Item  
Section Title  
Setting  
Ref.  
U
A
SIP Settings  
SIP Setting  
SIP User Agent*2  
Transport Protocol*2  
ü
ü
Transport Protocol for  
SIP  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
43  
       
3.1 Web User Interface Setting List  
Access  
Level*1  
Menu Item  
Section Title  
Setting  
Ref.  
U
A
SIP Settings  
[Line 1]–[Line 8]  
Phone Number  
SIP Server  
Phone Number*2  
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Registrar Server Address*2  
Registrar Server Port*2  
Proxy Server Address*2  
Proxy Server Port*2  
Presence Server Address*2  
Presence Server Port*2  
Outbound Proxy Server  
Outbound Proxy Server  
Address*2  
Outbound Proxy Server Port*2  
Service Domain*2  
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
SIP Service Domain  
SIP Source Port  
Source Port*2  
SIP Authentication  
Authentication ID*2  
Authentication Password*2  
Enable DNS SRV lookup*2  
SRV lookup Prefix for UDP*2  
SRV lookup Prefix for TCP*2  
T1 Timer*2  
DNS  
Timer Settings  
T2 Timer*2  
INVITE Retry Count*2  
Non-INVITE Retry Count*2  
Quality of Service (QoS) SIP Packet QoS (DSCP)*2  
SIP extensions  
Supports 100rel (RFC 3262)*2  
Supports Session Timer (RFC  
4028)*2  
Keep Alive  
Security  
Keep Alive Interval*2  
ü
ü
Enable SSAF (SIP Source  
Address Filter)*2  
VoIP Settings  
RTP Settings  
RTP Packet Time*2  
ü
ü
ü
Minimum RTP Port Number*2  
Maximum RTP Port Number*2  
44  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
3.1 Web User Interface Setting List  
Access  
Level*1  
Ref.  
Menu Item  
Section Title  
Setting  
U
A
VoIP Settings  
[Line 1]–[Line 8]  
Quality of Service (QoS) RTP Packet QoS (DSCP)*2  
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Statistical Information  
Jitter Buffer  
RTCP Interval*2  
Maximum Delay*2  
Minimum Delay*2  
Initial Delay*2  
DTMF  
DTMF Type*2  
Telephone-event Payload  
Type*2  
Call Hold  
Supports RFC 2543  
(c=0.0.0.0)*2  
ü
CODEC Settings  
First CODEC*2  
Second CODEC*2  
Third CODEC*2  
Fourth CODEC*2  
Fifth CODEC*2  
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
*1  
*2  
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:  
U: User; A: Administrator  
A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level.  
This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming.  
Telephone  
Access  
Level*1  
Menu Item  
Section Title  
Setting  
Ref.  
U
A
Multi Number  
Settings  
Grouping Handset/  
Handset selection for  
receiving calls  
Line No.  
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Phone Number  
Handset No.  
Base  
Handset and Line No.  
selection for making  
calls  
Handset No.  
Base  
Line No.  
Default  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
45  
     
3.1 Web User Interface Setting List  
Access  
Level*1  
Menu Item  
Section Title  
Setting  
Ref.  
U
A
Call Control  
Call Control  
Send SUBSCRIBE to Voice  
Mail Server*2  
ü
Conference Server Address*2  
Inter-digit Timeout*2  
1–5*2  
ü
ü
ü
Emergency Call Phone  
Numbers  
Call Rejection Phone  
Numbers  
1–30  
ü
ü
ü
Call Control [Line Call Control  
1]–[Line 8]  
Display Name*2  
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Enable Privacy Mode*2  
Voice Mail Access Number*2  
Enable Shared Call*2  
Unique ID of Shared Call*2  
Synchronize Do Not Disturb  
and Call Forward*2  
Dial Plan  
Dial Plan*2  
ü
ü
Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not  
Match*2  
Call Features  
Block Caller ID  
Block Anonymous Call  
Do Not Disturb  
Unconditional  
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Call Forward  
Enable Call Forward  
Phone Number  
Busy  
ü
ü
ü
ü
Enable Call Forward  
Phone Number  
No Answer  
ü
ü
ü
ü
Enable Call Forward  
Phone Number  
Ring Count  
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
46  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
3.1 Web User Interface Setting List  
Access  
Level*1  
Ref.  
Menu Item  
Section Title  
Setting  
U
A
Tone Settings  
Dial Tone  
Tone Frequencies*2  
Tone Timings*2  
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Busy Tone  
Tone Frequencies*2  
Tone Timings*2  
Ringing Tone  
Stutter Tone  
Reorder Tone  
Howler Tone  
Tone Frequencies*2  
Tone Timings*2  
Tone Frequencies*2  
Tone Timings*2  
Tone Frequencies*2  
Tone Timings*2  
Tone Frequencies*2  
Tone Timings*2  
Start Time*2  
Import  
Phonebook  
Import Phonebook  
Export Phonebook  
Handset (or Base Unit)  
File Name  
ü
ü
ü
Export  
Handset (or Base Unit)  
Phonebook  
*1  
*2  
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:  
U: User; A: Administrator  
A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level.  
This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming.  
Maintenance  
Access  
Level*1  
Menu Item  
Section Title  
Setting  
Ref.  
U
A
Firmware  
Maintenance  
Firmware Maintenance  
Enable Firmware Update*2  
Update Type*2  
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Firmware File URL*2  
Encryption  
Local Firmware  
Update  
Local Firmware Update  
File Name  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
47  
     
3.2.1 Before Accessing the Web User Interface  
Access  
Level*1  
Menu Item  
Section Title  
Setting  
Ref.  
U
A
Provisioning  
Maintenance  
Provisioning  
Maintenance  
Enable Provisioning*2  
Standard File URL*2  
Product File URL*2  
Master File URL*2  
Cyclic Auto Resync*2  
Resync Interval*2  
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Header Value for Resync  
Event*2  
Reset to Defaults  
Restart  
ü
ü
*1  
*2  
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:  
U: User; A: Administrator  
A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level.  
This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming.  
3.2 Programming Instructions  
3.2.1 Before Accessing the Web User Interface  
Recommended Environment  
This unit supports the following specifications:  
HTTP Version  
HTTP/1.0 (RFC 1945), HTTP/1.1 (RFC 2616)  
Digest (or Basic)  
Authentication Method  
The Web user interface will operate correctly in the following environments:  
Operating System  
Web Browser  
Microsoft® Windows® XP or Windows Vista® operating system  
Internet Explorer® 6.0 (Windows XP only), Internet Explorer 7.0, or  
Internet Explorer 8.0 internet browser  
Language (recommended)  
English  
Opening/Closing the Web Port  
To access the Web user interface, you must open the unit’s Web port beforehand. For details, refer to the  
User Guide on the Panasonic Web site (® see Introduction).  
48  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
               
3.2.1 Before Accessing the Web User Interface  
Configuring Settings from the Base Unit (KX-TGP550 only)/Handset  
To open the unit’s Web port  
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in English alphabet  
1. Base unit: [MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][5][3][4]  
Handset: [MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][5][3][4]  
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "On" for "Embedded web" ® [SAVE]  
3. Base unit: [EXIT]  
Handset: [OFF]  
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in symbols/pictures  
1. Base unit:  
Handset:  
(middle soft key) ® [#][5][3][4]  
(center of joystick) ® [#][5][3][4]  
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "On" for "Embedded web" ® [SAVE]  
3. Base unit: [  
Handset: [  
]
]
To close the unit’s Web port  
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in English alphabet  
1. Base unit: [MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][5][3][4]  
Handset: [MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][5][3][4]  
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Off" for "Embedded web" ® [SAVE]  
3. Base unit: [EXIT]  
Handset: [OFF]  
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in symbols/pictures  
1. Base unit:  
Handset:  
(middle soft key) ® [#][5][3][4]  
(center of joystick) ® [#][5][3][4]  
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Off" for "Embedded web" ® [SAVE]  
3. Base unit: [  
Handset: [  
]
]
Configuring Settings from the Web User Interface  
To close the unit’s Web port  
1. In the Web user interface, click [Web Port Close].  
2. Click OK.  
Note  
The Web port of the unit will be closed automatically in the following conditions:  
The port close timer configured through the Web user interface expires (® see [Port Close  
3 consecutive unsuccessful login attempts occur.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
49  
   
3.2.2 Accessing the Web User Interface  
Access Levels (IDs and Passwords)  
2 accounts with different access privileges are provided for accessing the Web user interface: User and  
Administrator. Each account has its own ID and password, which are required to log in to the Web user  
interface.  
ID  
(default)  
Password  
(default)  
Account  
User  
Target User  
End users  
Password Restrictions  
user  
-blank-  
(NULL)  
When logged in as User, you can  
change the password for the  
User account (® see  
The password can consist of 6 to  
16 ASCII characters  
(case-sensitive) (® see  
Administrator Network  
administrators,  
etc.  
admin  
adminpass  
When logged in as Administrator,  
you can change the password for  
both the User and Administrator  
accounts (® see  
The password can consist of 6 to  
16 ASCII characters  
(case-sensitive) (® see  
Notice  
Only one account can be logged in to the Web user interface at a time. If you try to access the Web  
user interface while someone is logged in, you will be denied access.  
You cannot log in to the Web user interface even under the same account as someone who is already  
logged in.  
The user password is required to change the settings.  
The IDs can be changed through configuration file programming (® see "ADMIN_ID"  
and "USER_ID" in 4.3.1 Login Account Settings).  
You can reset the account IDs and passwords to their factory default settings by performing Reset Web  
ID/Password from the base unit or one of the handsets. For details, see 2.1.6 Reset Web ID/  
3.2.2 Accessing the Web User Interface  
The unit can be configured from the Web user interface.  
50  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
         
3.2.2 Accessing the Web User Interface  
To access the Web user interface  
1. Open your Web browser, and then enter "http://" followed by the unit’s IP address into the address field of  
your browser.  
Note  
To determine the unit’s IP address, perform the following operations on the base unit  
(KX-TGP550 only) or handset:  
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in English alphabet  
1. Base unit: [MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][5][0][1]  
Handset: [MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][5][0][1]  
2. Base unit: [EXIT]  
Handset: [OFF]  
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in symbols/pictures  
1. Base unit:  
Handset:  
(middle soft key) ® [#][5][0][1]  
(center of joystick) ® [#][5][0][1]  
2. Base unit: [  
Handset: [  
]
]
2. For authentication, enter your ID (username) and password, and then click OK.  
Notice  
The default ID for the User account is "user", and the default password is blank. The ID cannot be  
changed from the Web user interface, but it can be changed through configuration file  
programming.  
When you log in as User to the Web user interface for the first time, the [Change User  
Password] screen (® see 3.5.3 Change User Password) will be displayed. Enter a new  
password, and then perform authentication again with the new password to log in to the Web user  
interface.  
The default ID for the Administrator account is "admin", and the default password is "adminpass".  
The ID cannot be changed from the Web user interface, but it can be changed through configuration  
file programming.  
3. The Web user interface window is displayed. Configure the settings for the unit as desired.  
4. You can log out from the Web user interface at any time by clicking [Web Port Close].  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
51  
 
3.2.2 Accessing the Web User Interface  
Controls on the Window  
The Web user interface window contains various controls for navigating and configuring settings. The following  
figure shows the controls that are displayed on the [Basic Network Settings] screen as an example:  
A
B
C
D
Note  
The screen shots shown are taken from the Web user interface of the KX-TGP550T04, so the model  
name may differ from that shown on your PC.  
Actual default values may vary depending on your phone system dealer.  
Tabs  
Tabs are the top categories for classifying settings. When you click a tab, the corresponding menu items  
and the configuration screen of the first menu item appear. There are 6 tabs for the Administrator account  
and 4 tabs for the User account. For details about the account types, see Access Levels (IDs and  
Passwords) in this section.  
Menu  
The menu displays the sub-categories of the selected tab.  
Configuration Screen  
Clicking a menu displays the corresponding configuration screen, which contains the actual settings,  
grouped into sections. For details, see 3.3 Status to 3.8.5 Restart.  
Buttons  
The following standard buttons are displayed in the Web user interface:  
Button  
Function  
Web Port Close  
Closes the Web port of the unit and logs you out of the Web user interface after  
a confirmation message is displayed.  
Save  
Applies changes and displays a result message (® see Result Messages in  
this section).  
Cancel  
Discards changes. The settings on the current screen will return to the values  
they had before being changed.  
52  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
         
3.2.2 Accessing the Web User Interface  
Button  
Refresh  
Function  
Updates the status information displayed on the screen. This button is  
displayed in the upper-right area of the [Network Status] and [VoIP Status]  
screens.  
Entering Characters  
In the Web user interface, when specifying a name, message, password, or other text item, you can enter any  
of the ASCII characters displayed in the following table with a white background.  
However, there are additional limitations for certain types of fields as follows:  
Number field  
You may only enter a sequence of numeric characters.  
You cannot leave the field empty.  
IP Address field  
You can enter the IP address using dotted-decimal notation (i.e., "n.n.n.n" where n=0–255).  
You cannot enter invalid IP addresses, for example, "0.0.0.0", "255.255.255.255", or "127.0.0.1".  
FQDN field  
The field cannot contain ", &, ', <, >, or trailing spaces.  
You can enter the IP address using dotted-decimal notation (i.e., "n.n.n.n" where n=0–255).  
You cannot enter invalid IP addresses, for example, "0.0.0.0", "255.255.255.255", or "127.0.0.1".  
Authentication ID/Password field  
The field cannot contain ", &, ', :, <, >, or space.  
The length of user password and administrator password must be from 6 to 16 characters.  
Display Name field (® see [Display Name] in 3.7.3.1 Call Control)  
This is the only field in which you can enter Unicode characters.  
Result Messages  
When you click [Save] after changing the settings on the current configuration screen, one of the following  
messages will appear in the upper-left area of the current configuration screen:  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
53  
           
3.2.2 Accessing the Web User Interface  
Result Message  
Description  
Applicable Screens  
Complete  
The operation has successfully completed. All screens except  
All screens  
Failed (Parameter Error)  
The operation failed because:  
Some specified values are out of range  
or invalid.  
Failed (Memory Access  
The operation failed because:  
All screens  
Failure)  
Access error to the flash memory  
occurred while reading or writing the  
data.  
Failed (Transfer Failure)*1  
Failed (Busy)  
The operation failed because:  
All screens  
All screens  
A network error occurred during the  
data transmission.  
The operation failed because:  
The base unit or handset is in an  
operation that accesses the flash  
memory of the base unit.  
When attempting to import/export the  
phonebook data, the base unit  
(KX-TGP550 only) or handset is on a  
call.  
While transferring the phonebook data,  
a call arrived at the base unit  
(KX-TGP550 only) or handset.  
When attempting to import/export the  
phonebook data, a menu operation that  
communicates with the base unit is  
being performed on the target handset.  
When updating the firmware, the base  
unit or handset is on a call.  
54  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
3.2.2 Accessing the Web User Interface  
Result Message  
Failed (Canceled)  
Description  
Applicable Screens  
The operation failed because:  
While transferring the phonebook data,  
The following key was pressed on  
the handset.  
In cases when buttons/soft key  
icons are shown in English  
alphabet  
[OFF]  
In cases when buttons/soft key  
icons are shown in symbols/  
pictures  
[
]
IP Reset was performed on the  
base unit (KX-TGP550 only) or  
handset.  
While transferring the firmware file, IP  
Reset was performed on the base unit  
(KX-TGP550 only) or handset.  
While transferring the phonebook data,  
The following key was pressed on  
the base unit (KX-TGP550 only) or  
handset.  
In cases when buttons/soft key  
icons are shown in English  
alphabet  
Base unit: [EXIT]  
Handset: [OFF]  
In cases when buttons/soft key  
icons are shown in symbols/  
pictures  
Base unit: [  
Handset: [  
]
]
IP Reset was performed on the  
base unit (KX-TGP550 only) or  
handset.  
While transferring the phonebook data,  
the connection with the base unit  
(KX-TGP550 only) or handset was  
interrupted.  
Failed (Invalid File)  
The operation failed because:  
The imported UTF-16 text file has an  
invalid BOM (Byte-order Mark).  
The firmware file is corrupted or invalid.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
55  
3.3 Status  
Result Message  
Failed (File Size Error)  
Description  
Applicable Screens  
The operation failed because:  
The size of the imported phonebook is  
too large.  
The size of the firmware file is  
insufficient.  
Failed (No Handset, or Busy) The operation failed because:  
When attempting to import/export the  
phonebook data, the handset had not  
been registered yet, or the connection  
with the base unit (KX-TGP550 only) or  
handset has been disconnected.  
When attempting to import/export the  
phonebook data, a menu operation  
was being performed on the handset,  
preventing communication with the  
base unit.  
Memory Full  
The operation failed because:  
When attempting to import the  
phonebook data, the total number of  
phonebook entries, including the  
existing entries, exceeds the limit (of up  
to 100 entries).  
No Data  
The operation failed because:  
The imported phonebook file contains  
no valid phonebook entries.  
No phonebook entry is registered in the  
export source base unit (KX-TGP550  
only) or handset.  
*1  
"Failed (Transfer Failure)" may not be displayed depending on your Web browser.  
Notice  
Do not click the navigation buttons of your Web browser or open a new window to display the screen.  
Otherwise, an error ("403 Forbidden") will occur when you click [Save].  
3.3 Status  
This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the [Status] tab.  
56  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
     
3.3.1 Version Information  
3.3.1 Version Information  
This screen allows you to view the current version information such as the model number and the firmware  
version of the unit.  
3.3.1.1 Version Information  
Model  
Description  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Indicates the model number of the unit (reference only).  
Model number  
Current model number  
Operating BANK  
Description  
Indicates the storage area of the firmware that is currently operating  
(reference only).  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Bank1  
Bank2  
Not applicable.  
IPL Version  
Description  
Indicates the version of the IPL (Initial Program Load) that runs when  
starting the unit (reference only).  
Value Range  
Default Value  
IPL version ("nn.nn" [n=0–9])  
Current IPL version  
Firmware Version  
Description  
Indicates the version of the firmware that is currently installed on the  
unit (reference only).  
Value Range  
Bank1 (Bank2): Firmware version ("nn.nn" [n=0–9])  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
57  
                     
3.3.2 Network Status  
Default Value  
Current firmware version  
3.3.2 Network Status  
This screen allows you to view the current network information of the unit, such as the MAC address, IP  
address, Ethernet port status, etc.  
Clicking [Refresh] updates the information displayed on the screen.  
3.3.2.1 Network Status  
MAC Address  
Description  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Indicates the MAC address of the unit (reference only).  
Not applicable.  
Default MAC address (example: 0080F0ABCDEF)  
Ethernet Link Status (LAN Port)  
Description  
Value Range  
Indicates the current connection status of the Ethernet LAN port  
(reference only).  
Connected  
Not connected  
Default Value  
Not applicable.  
Ethernet Link Status (PC Port) (KX-TGP550 only)  
Description  
Value Range  
Indicates the current connection status of the Ethernet PC port  
(reference only).  
Connected  
Not connected  
Default Value  
Not applicable.  
58  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
                   
3.3.2 Network Status  
Connection Mode  
Description  
Indicates whether the IP address of the unit is assigned automatically  
(DHCP) or manually (static) (reference only).  
Value Range  
Default Value  
DHCP  
Static  
Not applicable.  
IP Address  
Description  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Indicates the currently assigned IP address of the unit (reference only).  
IP address  
Current IP address  
Subnet Mask  
Description  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Indicates the specified subnet mask for the unit (reference only).  
Subnet mask  
Current subnet mask  
Default Gateway  
Description  
Indicates the specified IP address of the default gateway for the network  
(reference only).  
Note  
If the default gateway address is not specified, this field will be  
left blank.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
IP address of the default gateway  
Not applicable.  
DNS1  
Description  
Indicates the specified IP address of the primary DNS server (reference  
only).  
Note  
If the primary DNS server address is not specified, this field will  
be left blank.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
IP address of the primary DNS server  
Not applicable.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
59  
                     
3.3.3 VoIP Status  
DNS2  
Description  
Indicates the specified IP address of the secondary DNS server  
(reference only).  
Note  
If the secondary DNS server address is not specified, this field  
will be left blank.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
IP address of the secondary DNS server  
Not applicable.  
3.3.3 VoIP Status  
This screen allows you to view the current VoIP status of each line’s unit.  
Clicking [Refresh] updates the information displayed on the screen.  
3.3.3.1 VoIP Status  
Line No.  
Description  
Indicates the line number (1–8) to which a phone number is assigned  
(reference only).  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Line 1–Line 8  
Not applicable.  
Phone Number  
Description  
Indicates the currently assigned phone numbers (reference only).  
Note  
The corresponding field is blank if a line has not yet been leased  
or if the unit has not been configured.  
Value Range  
Max. 24 digits  
60  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
                     
3.4.1 Basic Network Settings  
Default Value  
Not applicable.  
VoIP Status  
Description  
Value Range  
Indicates the current VoIP status of each line (reference only).  
Registered: The unit has been registered to the SIP server, and the  
line can be used.  
Registering: The unit is being registered to the SIP server, and the  
line cannot be used.  
Blank: The line has not been leased, or the unit has not been  
configured yet.  
Note  
Immediately after starting up the unit, the phone numbers of the  
lines will be displayed, but the status of the line may not be  
displayed because the unit is still being registered to the SIP  
server. To display the status, wait about 30 to 60 seconds, and  
then click [Refresh] to obtain updated status information.  
Default Value  
Not applicable.  
3.4 Network  
This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the [Network] tab.  
3.4.1 Basic Network Settings  
This screen allows you to change basic network settings such as whether to use a DHCP server, and the IP  
address of the unit.  
Note  
Changes to the settings on this screen are applied when the message "Complete" appears after clicking  
[Save]. Because the IP address of the unit will probably be changed if you change these settings, you  
will not be able to continue using the Web user interface. To continue configuring the unit from the Web  
user interface, log in to the Web user interface again after confirming the newly assigned IP address  
of the unit using the phone user interface. In addition, if the IP address of the PC from which you try to  
access the Web user interface has been changed, close the Web port once by selecting "Off"  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
61  
           
3.4.1 Basic Network Settings  
for "Embedded web" on the base unit (KX-TGP550 only) or handset (® see Opening/Closing the  
3.4.1.1 Connection Mode  
Connection Mode  
Description  
Selects whether to assign the IP address automatically (DHCP) or  
manually (static).  
Value Range  
DHCP  
Static  
Default Value  
DHCP  
Phone User Interface  
Reference  
Configuration File Reference  
3.4.1.2 DHCP Settings  
Host Name  
Description  
Specifies the host name for the unit to send to the DHCP server.  
Note  
This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set  
to [DHCP].  
Value Range  
Max. 63 characters  
Note  
You cannot leave this field empty.  
62  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
             
3.4.1 Basic Network Settings  
Default Value  
Model number (example: TGP5nn)  
Configuration File Reference  
Domain Name Server  
Description  
Selects whether to receive DNS server addresses automatically or to  
assign a DNS server addresses (up to 2) manually.  
Note  
This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set  
to [DHCP].  
Value Range  
Receive DNS server address automatically  
Use the following settings  
DNS1  
DNS2  
Note  
If you select [Use the following settings], specify the IP  
address(es) of the primary and, if necessary, secondary DNS  
server(s) manually. The permissible values are:  
Max. 15 characters ("n.n.n.n" [n=0–255], except "0.0.0.0",  
"255.255.255.255", "127.0.0.1", etc.)  
Default Value  
Receive DNS server address automatically  
Phone User Interface  
Reference  
Configuration File Reference  
3.4.1.3 Static Settings  
Static IP Address  
Description  
Specifies the IP address for the unit.  
Note  
This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set  
to [Static].  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Max. 15 characters ("n.n.n.n" [n=0–255], except "0.0.0.0",  
"255.255.255.255", "127.0.0.1", etc.)  
Not stored.  
Phone User Interface  
Reference  
Configuration File Reference  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
63  
               
3.4.1 Basic Network Settings  
Subnet Mask  
Description  
Specifies the subnet mask for the unit.  
Note  
This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set  
to [Static].  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Max. 15 characters ("n.n.n.n" [n=0–255], except "0.0.0.0",  
"255.255.255.255", "127.0.0.1", etc.)  
Not stored.  
Phone User Interface  
Reference  
Configuration File Reference  
Default Gateway  
Description  
Specifies the IP address of the default gateway for the network where  
the unit is connected.  
Note  
This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set  
to [Static].  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Max. 15 characters ("n.n.n.n" [n=0–255], except "0.0.0.0",  
"255.255.255.255", "127.0.0.1", etc.)  
Not stored.  
Phone User Interface  
Reference  
Configuration File Reference  
DNS1  
Description  
Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.  
Note  
This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set  
to [Static].  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Max. 15 characters ("n.n.n.n" [n=0–255], except "0.0.0.0",  
"255.255.255.255", "127.0.0.1", etc.)  
Not stored.  
Phone User Interface  
Reference  
Configuration File Reference  
64  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
             
3.4.2 Ethernet Port Settings  
DNS2  
Description  
Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.  
Note  
This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set  
to [Static].  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Max. 15 characters ("n.n.n.n" [n=0–255], except "0.0.0.0",  
"255.255.255.255", "127.0.0.1", etc.)  
Not stored.  
Phone User Interface  
Reference  
Configuration File Reference  
3.4.2 Ethernet Port Settings  
This screen allows you to change the connection mode of the Ethernet ports and the VLAN settings.  
Note  
When you change the settings on this screen and click [Save], after the message "Complete" has been  
displayed, the base unit will restart automatically with the new settings applied. If a unit is on a call  
when "Complete" has been displayed, the base unit will restart after the unit returns to idle.  
Incorrect settings may cause a network failure. In such a case, you cannot access the Web user  
interface anymore. To access it again, you need to correct the speed/duplex settings (® see  
2.1.2 Speed/Duplex Settings) or perform IP Reset (® see 2.1.4 IP Reset) through phone user  
interface programming.  
3.4.2.1 Link Speed/Duplex Mode  
LAN Port  
Description  
Selects the connection mode (link speed and duplex mode) of the LAN  
port.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
65  
                   
3.4.2 Ethernet Port Settings  
Value Range  
Auto Negotiation  
100 Mbps/Full Duplex  
100 Mbps/Half Duplex  
10 Mbps/Full Duplex  
10 Mbps/Half Duplex  
Default Value  
Auto Negotiation  
Phone User Interface  
Reference  
PC Port (KX-TGP550 only)  
Description  
Selects the connection mode (link speed and duplex mode) of the PC  
port.  
Value Range  
Auto Negotiation  
100 Mbps/Full Duplex  
100 Mbps/Half Duplex  
10 Mbps/Full Duplex  
10 Mbps/Half Duplex  
Default Value  
Auto Negotiation  
Phone User Interface  
Reference  
3.4.2.2 VLAN Settings  
Enable VLAN (KX-TGP550 only)  
Description  
Value Range  
Selects whether to use the VLAN feature to perform VoIP  
communication securely.  
Yes  
No  
Default Value  
No  
Phone User Interface  
Reference  
Configuration File Reference  
IP Phone (VLAN ID) (KX-TGP550 only)  
Description  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Specifies the VLAN ID for this unit.  
1–4094  
2
Phone User Interface  
Reference  
66  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
               
3.4.2 Ethernet Port Settings  
Configuration File Reference  
IP Phone (Priority) (KX-TGP550 only)  
Description  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Selects the priority number for the unit.  
0–7  
7
Phone User Interface  
Reference  
Configuration File Reference  
PC (VLAN ID) (KX-TGP550 only)  
Description  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Specifies the VLAN ID for the PC.  
1–4094  
1
Phone User Interface  
Reference  
Configuration File Reference  
PC (Priority) (KX-TGP550 only)  
Description  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Selects the priority number for the PC.  
0–7  
0
Phone User Interface  
Reference  
Configuration File Reference  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
67  
           
3.4.3 HTTP Client Settings  
3.4.3 HTTP Client Settings  
This screen allows you to change the HTTP client settings for the unit in order to access the HTTP server of  
your phone system and download configuration files.  
3.4.3.1 HTTP Client Settings  
HTTP Version  
Description  
Value Range  
Selects which version of the HTTP protocol to use for HTTP  
communication.  
HTTP/1.0  
HTTP/1.1  
Note  
For this unit, it is strongly recommended that you select [HTTP/  
1.0]. However, if the HTTP server does not function well with  
HTTP/1.0, try changing the setting [HTTP/1.1].  
Default Value  
HTTP/1.0  
Configuration File Reference  
HTTP User Agent  
Description  
Specifies the text string to send as the user agent in the header of HTTP  
requests.  
68  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
             
3.4.3 HTTP Client Settings  
Value Range  
Max. 40 characters  
Note  
You cannot leave this field empty.  
If "{mac}" is included in this field, it will be replaced with the  
unit’s MAC address in lower-case.  
If "{MAC}" is included in this field, it will be replaced with the  
unit’s MAC address in upper-case.  
If "{MODEL}" is included in this field, it will be replaced with the  
unit’s model name.  
If "{fwver}" is included in this field, it will be replaced with the  
firmware version of the unit.  
Default Value  
Panasonic_{MODEL}/{fwver} ({mac})  
Configuration File Reference  
3.4.3.2 Proxy Server Settings  
Enable Proxy  
Description  
Value Range  
Selects whether to use the proxy server.  
Yes  
No  
Default Value  
No  
Proxy Server Address  
Description  
Value Range  
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the proxy server.  
Max. 127 characters  
Note  
You cannot leave this field empty if [Enable Proxy] is set to  
[Yes].  
Default Value  
Not stored.  
Proxy Server Port  
Description  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Specifies the port number of the proxy server.  
1–65535  
8080  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
69  
               
3.4.4 Global Address Detection  
3.4.4 Global Address Detection  
This screen allows you to configure the Global Address Detection feature and STUN server settings. The global  
IP address of the network the unit is connected to will be detected periodically. If the global IP address has  
changed, the new address will be registered to the SIP server.  
Note  
If the unit is connected directly to the Internet, or the network global address is static (i.e., does not  
change), you do not need to configure Global Address Detection.  
3.4.4.1 Global Address Detection  
Detection Method  
Description  
Value Range  
Selects the method to use for detecting the global IP address.  
STUN  
SIP  
Default Value  
STUN  
Detection Interval  
Description  
Specifies the interval, in seconds, to wait between attempts to detect  
the global IP address.  
Value Range  
0, 10–65535 (0: Disable)  
Note  
When [Detection Method] is set to [SIP], the value "0" disables  
detection and a value other than "0" enables detection.  
Default Value  
0
3.4.4.2 STUN Server  
STUN Server Address  
Description  
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the STUN server.  
70  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
                     
3.4.5 Static NAPT Settings  
Value Range  
Max. 127 characters  
Not stored.  
Default Value  
Configuration File Reference  
STUN Server Port  
Description  
Specifies the port number of the STUN server.  
Value Range  
1–65535  
Default Value  
3478  
Configuration File Reference  
3.4.5 Static NAPT Settings  
This screen allows you to configure the NAPT (Network Address Port Translation) settings. If the unit is  
connected behind a router that uses NAT/NAPT to translate private IP addresses, global IP addresses, VoIP  
packets might be blocked by the router, depending on the SIP server. To avoid this problem, this setting is  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
71  
           
3.4.5 Static NAPT Settings  
3.4.5.1 Global IP Address  
Global IP Address  
Description  
Specifies the global IP address of your network.  
Note  
You must enter a value in this field if at least 1 of [Line 1]–  
[Line 8] is set to [Yes], or when port numbers are specified in  
[Channel 1–3].  
The global IP address will reflect SIP messages and RTP  
packets.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
IP address in dotted-decimal notation ("n.n.n.n" [n=0-255])  
Not stored.  
3.4.5.2 Enable Global IP Address Usage per Line  
Line 1–Line 8  
Description  
Value Range  
Selects whether to enable the NAT Traversal feature for each line.  
Yes  
No  
Default Value  
No  
3.4.5.3 External RTP Port  
Channel 1–3  
Description  
Value Range  
Specifies the external RTP port number used for voice communication  
for each channel.  
0, 1024–49150 (0: Disable, even number only)  
Note  
Each channel must be set to a unique port number, and all port  
numbers must be an even number.  
You cannot specify here the same port number as any of the  
port numbers specified for the individual lines in [Source  
Port] in 3.6.2.5 SIP Source Port. In addition, you cannot  
specify a port number that is 1 less than a port number specified  
in [Source Port] if the source port number is an odd number.  
All 3 channels must be set to either enable or disable at the  
same time.  
Default Value  
0
72  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
                       
3.5.1 Web Language  
3.5 System  
This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the [System] tab.  
3.5.1 Web Language  
This screen allows you to select the language used for the Web user interface. The language setting is only  
applicable when you log in to the Web user interface as User.  
Note  
If you change the language while logged in to the Web user interface with the User account, the  
language will be changed after the message "Complete" is displayed. If you are logged in with the  
Administrator account, the language will be changed when a user logs in to the Web user interface as  
User.  
The language used for the Web user interface for the Administrator account is always English.  
The language used for the handsets (or the base unit [KX-TGP550 only]) remains unchanged even if  
the language for the Web user interface is changed.  
3.5.1.1 Web Language  
Language  
Description  
Value Range  
Selects the language used for the Web user interface when logged in  
with the User account.  
English (US)  
English (UK)  
Note  
The available languages may differ depending on the country/  
area of use.  
Default Value  
English (US)  
English (UK)  
Note  
The default is one of these, depending on the country/area of  
use.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
73  
               
3.5.2 Administrator Password  
3.5.2 Administrator Password  
This screen allows you to change the password used to authenticate the Administrator account when logging  
in to the Web user interface.  
Note  
For security reasons, the characters entered for the password are masked by special characters, which  
differ depending on the Web browser.  
After you change the administrator password, the next time you access the Web user interface, the  
authentication dialog box appears. 2 consecutive login failures will result in an error ("401  
Unauthorized"). This restriction only applies the first time you attempt to log in after changing the  
password. In all other circumstances, an error occurs after 3 unsuccessful login attempts.  
3.5.2.1 Change Administrator Password  
New Password  
Description  
Specifies the password to use to authenticate the Administrator account  
when logging in to the Web user interface.  
6–16 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)  
adminpass  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Configuration File Reference  
Confirm New Password  
Description  
Specifies the same password that you entered in [New Password] for  
confirmation.  
Value Range  
6–16 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)  
Note  
This value must be the same as the value entered in [New  
Password].  
Default Value  
adminpass  
Configuration File Reference  
74  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
               
3.5.3 Change User Password  
3.5.3 Change User Password  
This screen allows you to change the password used to authenticate the User account when logging in to the  
Web user interface.  
Note  
For security reasons, the characters entered for the password are masked by special characters, which  
differ depending on the Web browser.  
After you change the user password, the next time you access the Web user interface, the  
authentication dialog box appears. 2 consecutive login failures will result in an error ("401  
Unauthorized"). This restriction only applies the first time you attempt to log in after changing the  
password. In all other circumstances, an error occurs after 3 unsuccessful login attempts.  
3.5.3.1 Change User Password  
New Password  
Description  
Specifies the password to use to authenticate the User account when  
logging in to the Web user interface.  
6–16 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)  
Not stored.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Note  
When a user logs in to the Web user interface for the first time,  
after clicking OK on the authentication dialog box, the [Change  
User Password] screen is displayed automatically to make the  
user set a password.  
Configuration File Reference  
Confirm New Password  
Description  
Specifies the same password that you entered in [New Password] for  
confirmation.  
Value Range  
6–16 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)  
Note  
This value must be the same as the value entered in [New  
Password].  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
75  
             
3.5.4 Web Server Settings  
Default Value  
Not stored.  
Configuration File Reference  
3.5.4 Web Server Settings  
This screen allows you to change the Web server settings.  
3.5.4.1 Web Server Settings  
Web Server Port  
Description  
Value Range  
Specifies the port number used by the Web server.  
80, 1024–49151  
Note  
You cannot specify here the same port number as any of the  
port numbers specified for the individual lines in [Source  
Default Value  
80  
Note  
When you change the default value of the port number to a  
value other than "80", such as "8080", enter the URL for  
accessing the Web user interface using the following format:  
"http://192.168.0.100:8080/"  
(192.168.0.100: IP address of the unit)  
Port Close Timer  
Description  
Specifies the length of time, in minutes, to keep the Web port open when  
there has been no communication between the unit and the PC. If the  
specified length of time elapses without any communication, the Web  
port closes automatically. Communication is detected when you click a  
tab, menu item, the [Save] button, or by reloading the application or  
pressing the F5 key.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
1–1440  
30  
76  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
               
3.5.5 Time Adjust Settings  
3.5.5 Time Adjust Settings  
This screen allows you to enable automatic clock adjustment using an NTP server and configure the settings  
for DST (Daylight Saving Time), also known as Summer Time.  
3.5.5.1 Synchronization  
Enable Synchronization by NTP  
Description  
Value Range  
Selects whether to enable the unit to automatically adjust its clock  
according to the time information provided by an NTP server.  
Yes  
No  
Note  
Even if you select [Yes], this feature will not function properly  
if the NTP server address setting is invalid.  
Default Value  
Yes  
Synchronization Interval  
Description  
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between synchronizations with the  
NTP server.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
10–86400  
43200  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
77  
               
3.5.5 Time Adjust Settings  
Configuration File Reference  
3.5.5.2 Time Server  
NTP Server Address  
Description  
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the NTP server.  
Max. 127 characters  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Not stored.  
Configuration File Reference  
3.5.5.3 Time Zone  
Time Zone  
Description  
Selects your time zone.  
GMT -12:00–GMT +13:00  
GMT  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Configuration File Reference  
3.5.5.4 Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time)  
Enable DST (Enable Summer Time)  
Description  
Value Range  
Selects whether to enable DST (Summer Time).  
Yes  
No  
Default Value  
No  
Configuration File Reference  
DST Offset (Summer Time Offset)  
Description  
Specifies the amount of time, in minutes, to change the time when  
[Enable DST (Enable Summer Time)] is set to [Yes].  
Value Range  
0–720  
Default Value  
60  
Configuration File Reference  
78  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
                         
3.5.5 Time Adjust Settings  
3.5.5.5 Start Day and Time of DST (Start Day and Time of Summer Time)  
Month  
Description  
Value Range  
Selects the month in which DST (Summer Time) starts.  
January  
February  
March  
April  
May  
June  
July  
August  
September  
October  
November  
December  
Default Value  
March  
Configuration File Reference  
Day of Week  
Using the 2 following settings, specify on which day of the selected month DST (Summer Time) starts. For  
example, to specify the second Sunday, select [Second] and [Sunday].  
Description  
Value Range  
Selects the number of the week on which DST (Summer Time) starts.  
First  
Second  
Third  
Fourth  
Last  
Default Value  
Second  
Configuration File Reference  
Description  
Value Range  
Selects the day of the week on which DST (Summer Time) starts.  
Sunday  
Monday  
Tuesday  
Wednesday  
Thursday  
Friday  
Saturday  
Default Value  
Sunday  
Configuration File Reference  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
79  
           
3.5.5 Time Adjust Settings  
Time  
Description  
Specifies the start time of DST (Summer Time) in minutes after 12:00  
AM.  
Value Range  
0–1439  
Default Value  
120  
Configuration File Reference  
3.5.5.6 End Day and Time of DST (End Day and Time of Summer Time)  
Month  
Description  
Value Range  
Selects the month in which DST (Summer Time) ends.  
January  
February  
March  
April  
May  
June  
July  
August  
September  
October  
November  
December  
Default Value  
October  
Configuration File Reference  
Day of Week  
Using the 2 following settings, specify on which day of the selected month DST (Summer Time) ends. For  
example, to specify the second Sunday, select [Second] and [Sunday].  
Description  
Value Range  
Selects the number of the week on which DST (Summer Time) ends.  
First  
Second  
Third  
Fourth  
Last  
Default Value  
Second  
Configuration File Reference  
Description  
Selects the day of the week on which DST (Summer Time) ends.  
80  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
               
3.6.1 SIP Settings  
Value Range  
Sunday  
Monday  
Tuesday  
Wednesday  
Thursday  
Friday  
Saturday  
Default Value  
Sunday  
Configuration File Reference  
Time  
Description  
Specifies the end time of DST (Summer Time) in minutes after 12:00  
AM.  
Value Range  
0–1439  
Default Value  
120  
Configuration File Reference  
3.6 VoIP  
This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the [VoIP] tab.  
3.6.1 SIP Settings  
This screen allows you to change the SIP settings that are common to all lines.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
81  
           
3.6.1 SIP Settings  
3.6.1.1 SIP Setting  
SIP User Agent  
Description  
Value Range  
Specifies the text string to send as the user agent in the headers of SIP  
messages.  
Max. 40 characters  
Note  
You cannot leave this field empty.  
If "{mac}" is included in this field, it will be replaced with the  
unit’s MAC address in lower-case.  
If "{MAC}" is included in this field, it will be replaced with the  
unit’s MAC address in upper-case.  
If "{MODEL}" is included in this field, it will be replaced with the  
unit’s model name.  
If "{fwver}" is included in this field, it will be replaced with the  
firmware version of the unit.  
Default Value  
Panasonic_{MODEL}/{fwver} ({mac})  
Configuration File Reference  
3.6.1.2 Transport Protocol for SIP  
Transport Protocol  
Description  
Selects which transport layer protocol to use for sending SIP packets.  
Note  
If you change this setting, the unit will restart automatically once  
the message "Complete" appears. If the unit is on a call, it will  
restart after it returns to idle.  
Value Range  
UDP  
TCP  
Default Value  
UDP  
Configuration File Reference  
82  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
               
3.6.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]  
3.6.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]  
This screen allows you to change the SIP settings that are specific to each line.  
3.6.2.1 Phone Number  
Phone Number  
Description  
Value Range  
Specifies the phone number to use as the user ID required for  
registration to the SIP registrar server.  
Max. 24 characters (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)  
Note  
No other characters are allowed.  
Default Value  
Not stored.  
Configuration File Reference  
3.6.2.2 SIP Server  
Registrar Server Address  
Description  
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP registrar server.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
83  
                 
3.6.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]  
Value Range  
Max. 127 characters  
Default Value  
Not stored.  
Configuration File Reference  
Registrar Server Port  
Description  
Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP  
registrar server.  
Value Range  
1–65535  
Default Value  
5060  
Configuration File Reference  
Proxy Server Address  
Description  
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP proxy server.  
Max. 127 characters  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Not stored.  
Configuration File Reference  
Proxy Server Port  
Description  
Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP proxy  
server.  
Value Range  
1–65535  
Default Value  
5060  
Configuration File Reference  
Presence Server Address  
Description  
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP presence server.  
Max. 127 characters  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Not stored.  
Configuration File Reference  
Presence Server Port  
Description  
Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP  
presence server.  
84  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
                   
3.6.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]  
Value Range  
1–65535  
Default Value  
5060  
Configuration File Reference  
3.6.2.3 Outbound Proxy Server  
Outbound Proxy Server Address  
Description  
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP outbound proxy server.  
Max. 127 characters  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Not stored.  
Configuration File Reference  
Outbound Proxy Server Port  
Description  
Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP  
outbound proxy server.  
Value Range  
1–65535  
Default Value  
5060  
Configuration File Reference  
3.6.2.4 SIP Service Domain  
Service Domain  
Description  
Specifies the domain name provided by your phone system dealer. The  
domain name is the part of the SIP URI that comes after the "@" symbol.  
Value Range  
Max. 127 characters  
Default Value  
Not stored.  
Configuration File Reference  
3.6.2.5 SIP Source Port  
Source Port  
Description  
Specifies the source port number used by the unit for SIP  
communication.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
85  
                           
3.6.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]  
Value Range  
1024–49151  
Note  
You cannot specify here the same port number as any of the  
port numbers in [Channel 1–3] in 3.4.5.3 External RTP Port  
(if they are configured). In addition, you cannot specify a port  
number that is 1 greater than a port number specified in  
[Channel 1–3].  
The SIP port number for each line must be unique.  
You cannot specify the same port number as the port number  
specified in [Web Server Port] in 3.5.4.1 Web Server  
Default Value  
5060 (for Line 1)  
5070 (for Line 2)  
5080 (for Line 3)  
5090 (for Line 4)  
5100 (for Line 5)  
5110 (for Line 6)  
5120 (for Line 7)  
5130 (for Line 8)  
Configuration File Reference  
3.6.2.6 SIP Authentication  
Authentication ID  
Description  
Specifies the authentication ID required to access the SIP server.  
Max. 64 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)  
Not stored.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Configuration File Reference  
Authentication Password  
Description  
Specifies the authentication password used to access the SIP server.  
Max. 64 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)  
Not stored.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Configuration File Reference  
3.6.2.7 DNS  
Enable DNS SRV lookup  
Description  
Selects whether to request the DNS server to translate domain names  
into IP addresses using the SRV record.  
86  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
                   
3.6.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]  
Value Range  
Yes  
No  
Note  
If you select [Yes], the unit will perform a DNS SRV lookup for  
a SIP registrar server, SIP proxy server, SIP outbound proxy  
server, or SIP presence server. If you select [No], the unit will  
not perform a DNS SRV lookup for a SIP registrar server, SIP  
proxy server, SIP outbound proxy server, or SIP presence  
server.  
Default Value  
No  
Configuration File Reference  
SRV lookup Prefix for UDP  
Description  
Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS  
SRV lookup using UDP.  
Note  
This setting is available only when [Enable DNS SRV  
lookup] is set to [Yes].  
Value Range  
Max. 32 characters  
Default Value  
_sip._udp.  
Configuration File Reference  
SRV lookup Prefix for TCP  
Description  
Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS  
SRV lookup using TCP.  
Note  
This setting is available only when [Enable DNS SRV  
lookup] is set to [Yes].  
Value Range  
Max. 32 characters  
Default Value  
_sip._tcp.  
Configuration File Reference  
3.6.2.8 Timer Settings  
T1 Timer  
Description  
Selects the default interval, in milliseconds, between transmissions of  
SIP messages. For details, refer to RFC 3261.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
87  
               
3.6.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]  
Value Range  
250  
500  
1000  
2000  
4000  
Default Value  
500  
Configuration File Reference  
T2 Timer  
Description  
Selects the maximum interval, in seconds, between transmissions of  
SIP messages. For details, refer to RFC 3261.  
Value Range  
2
4
8
16  
32  
Default Value  
4
Configuration File Reference  
INVITE Retry Count  
Description  
Selects the number of times that INVITE requests are retransmitted  
when no reply is received from the server.  
Value Range  
1–6  
Default Value  
6
Configuration File Reference  
Non-INVITE Retry Count  
Description  
Selects the number of times that non-INVITE requests (general SIP  
messages) are retransmitted when no reply is received from the server.  
Value Range  
1–10  
Default Value  
10  
Configuration File Reference  
88  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
           
3.6.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]  
3.6.2.9 Quality of Service (QoS)  
SIP Packet QoS (DSCP)  
Description  
Value Range  
Selects the DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) level of DiffServ  
applied to SIP packets.  
Best Effort (default) (000 000)  
AF11 (Class1/Level Low) (001 010)  
AF12 (Class1/Level Medium) (001 100)  
AF13 (Class1/Level High) (001 110)  
AF21 (Class2/Level Low) (010 010)  
AF22 (Class2/Level Medium) (010 100)  
AF23 (Class2/Level High) (010 110)  
AF31 (Class3/Level Low) (011 010)  
AF32 (Class3/Level Medium) (011 100)  
AF33 (Class3/Level High) (011 110)  
AF41 (Class4/Level Low) (100 010)  
AF42 (Class4/Level Medium) (100 100)  
AF43 (Class4/Level High) (100 110)  
CS1 (Class1) (001 000)  
CS2 (Class2) (010 000)  
CS3 (Class3) (011 000)  
CS4 (Class4) (100 000)  
CS5 (Class5) (101 000)  
CS6 (Class6) (110 000)  
CS7 (Class7) (111 000)  
EF (Expedited Forwarding) (101 110)  
Default Value  
Best Effort (default) (000 000)  
Configuration File Reference  
3.6.2.10 SIP extensions  
Supports 100rel (RFC 3262)  
Description  
Selects whether to add the option tag 100rel to the "Supported" header  
of the INVITE message. For details, refer to RFC 3262.  
Value Range  
Yes  
No  
Note  
If you select [Yes], the Reliability of Provisional Responses  
function will be enabled. The option tag 100rel will be added to  
the "Supported" header of the INVITE message and to the  
"Require" header of the "1xx" provisional message. If you select  
[No], the option tag 100rel will not be used.  
Default Value  
No  
Configuration File Reference  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
89  
                 
3.6.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]  
Supports Session Timer (RFC 4028)  
Description  
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the unit waits before  
terminating SIP sessions when no reply to repeated requests is  
received. For details, refer to RFC 4028.  
Value Range  
0, 60–65535 (0: Disable)  
Default Value  
0
Configuration File Reference  
3.6.2.11 Keep Alive  
Keep Alive Interval  
Description  
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between transmissions of the Keep  
Alive packet to the unit in order to maintain the NAT binding information.  
Note  
This setting is available only when [Transport Protocol] is set  
to [UDP].  
Value Range  
0, 10–300 (0: Disable)  
Default Value  
0
Configuration File Reference  
3.6.2.12 Security  
Enable SSAF (SIP Source Address Filter)  
Description  
Value Range  
Selects whether to enable SSAF (SIP Source Address Filter) for the  
SIP servers (registrar server, proxy server, and presence server).  
Yes  
No  
Note  
If you select [Yes], the unit receives SIP messages only from  
the source addresses stored in the SIP servers (registrar  
server, proxy server, and presence server), and not from other  
addresses. However, if [Outbound Proxy Server Address] in  
3.6.2.3 Outbound Proxy Server is specified, the unit also  
receives SIP messages from the source address stored in the  
SIP outbound proxy server.  
Default Value  
No  
Configuration File Reference  
90  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
                       
3.6.3 VoIP Settings  
3.6.3 VoIP Settings  
This screen allows you to change the VoIP settings that are common to all lines.  
3.6.3.1 RTP Settings  
RTP Packet Time  
Description  
Value Range  
Selects the interval, in milliseconds, between transmissions of RTP  
packets.  
20  
30  
40  
Default Value  
20  
Configuration File Reference  
Minimum RTP Port Number  
Description  
Specifies the lowest port number that the unit will use for RTP packets.  
Note  
If port numbers are specified in [Channel 1–3] in  
3.4.5.3 External RTP Port, this setting is ignored and the  
corresponding external RTP port is enabled.  
Value Range  
1024–48750 (even number only)  
Note  
The value for this setting must be less than or equal to  
"[Maximum RTP Port Number] - 400".  
Default Value  
16000  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
91  
               
3.6.4 VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]  
Configuration File Reference  
Maximum RTP Port Number  
Description  
Specifies the highest port number that the unit will use for RTP packets.  
Note  
If port numbers are specified in [Channel 1–3] in  
3.4.5.3 External RTP Port, this setting is ignored and the  
corresponding external RTP port is enabled.  
Value Range  
1424–49150 (even number only)  
Note  
The value for this setting must be greater than or equal to  
"[Minimum RTP Port Number] + 400".  
Default Value  
20000  
Configuration File Reference  
3.6.4 VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]  
This screen allows you to change the VoIP settings that are specific to each line.  
92  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
       
3.6.4 VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]  
3.6.4.1 Quality of Service (QoS)  
RTP Packet QoS (DSCP)  
Description  
Value Range  
Selects the DSCP level of DiffServ applied to RTP packets.  
Best Effort (default) (000 000)  
AF11 (Class1/Level Low) (001 010)  
AF12 (Class1/Level Medium) (001 100)  
AF13 (Class1/Level High) (001 110)  
AF21 (Class2/Level Low) (010 010)  
AF22 (Class2/Level Medium) (010 100)  
AF23 (Class2/Level High) (010 110)  
AF31 (Class3/Level Low) (011 010)  
AF32 (Class3/Level Medium) (011 100)  
AF33 (Class3/Level High) (011 110)  
AF41 (Class4/Level Low) (100 010)  
AF42 (Class4/Level Medium) (100 100)  
AF43 (Class4/Level High) (100 110)  
CS1 (Class1) (001 000)  
CS2 (Class2) (010 000)  
CS3 (Class3) (011 000)  
CS4 (Class4) (100 000)  
CS5 (Class5) (101 000)  
CS6 (Class6) (110 000)  
CS7 (Class7) (111 000)  
EF (Expedited Forwarding) (101 110)  
Default Value  
Best Effort (default) (000 000)  
Configuration File Reference  
3.6.4.2 Statistical Information  
RTCP Interval  
Description  
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between RTCP packets.  
Value Range  
0, 5–65535 (0: Disable)  
Default Value  
0
Configuration File Reference  
3.6.4.3 Jitter Buffer  
Maximum Delay  
Description  
Specifies the maximum delay, in 10-millisecond units, of the jitter buffer.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
93  
                       
3.6.4 VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]  
Value Range  
3–50 (´ 10 ms)  
Note  
This setting is subject to the following conditions:  
This value must be greater than [Initial Delay]  
This value must be greater than [Minimum Delay]  
[Initial Delay] must be greater than or equal to [Minimum  
Delay]  
Default Value  
20 (´ 10 ms)  
Configuration File Reference  
Minimum Delay  
Description  
Value Range  
Specifies the minimum delay, in 10-millisecond units, of the jitter buffer.  
1 or 2 (´ 10 ms)  
Note  
This setting is subject to the following conditions:  
This value must be less than or equal to [Initial Delay]  
This value must be less than [Maximum Delay]  
[Maximum Delay] must be greater than [Initial Delay]  
Default Value  
2 (´ 10 ms)  
Configuration File Reference  
Initial Delay  
Description  
Value Range  
Specifies the initial delay, in 10-millisecond units, of the jitter buffer.  
1–7 (´ 10 ms)  
Note  
This setting is subject to the following conditions:  
This value must be greater than or equal to [Minimum  
Delay]  
This value must be less than [Maximum Delay]  
Default Value  
2 (´ 10 ms)  
Configuration File Reference  
3.6.4.4 DTMF  
DTMF Type  
Description  
Selects the method for transmitting DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency)  
tones.  
94  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
               
3.6.4 VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]  
Value Range  
Outband  
Inband  
Note  
If you select [Outband], DTMF tones will be sent through SDP  
(Session Description Protocol), compliant with RFC 2833. If you  
select [Inband], DTMF tones will be encoded in the RTP  
stream.  
Default Value  
Outband  
Configuration File Reference  
Telephone-event Payload Type  
Description  
Specifies the RFC 2833 payload type for DTMF tones.  
Note  
This setting is available only when [DTMF Type] is set to  
[Outband].  
Value Range  
96–127  
101  
Default Value  
Configuration File Reference  
3.6.4.5 Call Hold  
Supports RFC 2543 (c=0.0.0.0)  
Description  
Value Range  
Selects whether to enable the RFC 2543 Call Hold feature on this line.  
Yes  
No  
Note  
If you select [Yes], the "c=0.0.0.0" syntax will be set in SDP  
when sending a re-INVITE message to hold the call. If you  
select [No], the "c=x.x.x.x" syntax will be set in SDP.  
Default Value  
Yes  
Configuration File Reference  
3.6.4.6 CODEC Settings  
First CODEC  
Description  
Selects which codec to assign the highest priority to.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
95  
                   
3.6.4 VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]  
Value Range  
G722  
PCMA (G.711 A-law)  
G726-32 (G.726 [32k])  
G729A  
PCMU (G.711 µ-law)  
Note  
You can select each codec on once within [CODEC Settings].  
A maximum of 5 priorities can be assigned. If only 4 codecs are  
specified in a configuration file, you will be able to select from  
only 4 codecs, and [Fifth CODEC] will be disabled.  
The codec selections that are displayed may vary depending  
on the unit or the operating environment.  
Default Value  
G722  
Configuration File Reference  
Second CODEC  
Description  
Value Range  
Selects the codec to assign the second highest priority to.  
G722  
PCMA (G.711 A-law)  
G726-32 (G.726 [32k])  
G729A  
PCMU (G.711 µ-law)  
Note  
You can select each codec on once within [CODEC Settings].  
A maximum of 5 priorities can be assigned. If only 4 codecs are  
specified in a configuration file, you will be able to select from  
only 4 codecs, and [Fifth CODEC] will be disabled.  
The codec selections that are displayed may vary depending  
on the unit or the operating environment.  
Default Value  
PCMA  
Configuration File Reference  
Third CODEC  
Description  
Selects the codec to assign the third highest priority to.  
96  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
       
3.6.4 VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]  
Value Range  
G722  
PCMA (G.711 A-law)  
G726-32 (G.726 [32k])  
G729A  
PCMU (G.711 µ-law)  
Note  
You can select each codec on once within [CODEC Settings].  
A maximum of 5 priorities can be assigned. If only 4 codecs are  
specified in a configuration file, you will be able to select from  
only 4 codecs, and [Fifth CODEC] will be disabled.  
The codec selections that are displayed may vary depending  
on the unit or the operating environment.  
Default Value  
G726-32  
Configuration File Reference  
Fourth CODEC  
Description  
Value Range  
Selects the codec to assign the 4th highest priority to.  
G722  
PCMA (G.711 A-law)  
G726-32 (G.726 [32k])  
G729A  
PCMU (G.711 µ-law)  
Note  
You can select each codec on once within [CODEC Settings].  
A maximum of 5 priorities can be assigned. If only 4 codecs are  
specified in a configuration file, you will be able to select from  
only 4 codecs, and [Fifth CODEC] will be disabled.  
The codec selections that are displayed may vary depending  
on the unit or the operating environment.  
Default Value  
G729A  
Configuration File Reference  
Fifth CODEC  
Description  
Selects the codec to assign the lowest priority to.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
97  
       
3.7.1 Multi Number Settings  
Value Range  
G722  
PCMA (G.711 A-law)  
G726-32 (G.726 [32k])  
G729A  
PCMU (G.711 µ-law)  
Note  
You can select each codec on once within [CODEC Settings].  
A maximum of 5 priorities can be assigned. If only 4 codecs are  
specified in a configuration file, you will be able to select from  
only 4 codecs, and [Fifth CODEC] will be disabled.  
The codec selections that are displayed may vary depending  
on the unit or the operating environment.  
Default Value  
PCMU  
Configuration File Reference  
3.7 Telephone  
This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the [Telephone] tab.  
3.7.1 Multi Number Settings  
This screen allows you to assign phone numbers for incoming and outgoing calls to the base unit  
(KX-TGP550 only) and handsets.  
A maximum of 8 phone numbers can be assigned for each unit. A maximum of 6 handsets can be registered  
to the base unit. For details, see 5.1 Line Settings for Base Unit and Handset.  
Note  
You can configure these settings even in the following cases:  
The line has not been leased, or the unit has not been configured yet.  
98  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
       
3.7.1 Multi Number Settings  
The handset has not been registered yet, or the connection with the base unit (KX-TGP550 only)  
or handset has been disconnected.  
3.7.1.1 Grouping Handset/Handset selection for receiving calls  
Line No.  
Description  
Indicates the line number (1–8) to which a phone number is assigned  
(reference only).  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Line 1–Line 8  
Not applicable.  
Phone Number  
Description  
Indicates the currently assigned phone numbers (reference only).  
Note  
The corresponding field is blank if a line has not yet been leased  
or if the unit has not been configured.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Max. 24 digits  
Not applicable.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
99  
           
3.7.1 Multi Number Settings  
Handset No.  
Description  
Value Range  
Selects the handsets (1–6) that calls will arrive at for each line.  
Selected, Not selected  
Note  
You cannot clear all the check boxes including [Base  
(KX-TGP550 only)].  
Default Value  
Selected (all)  
Base (KX-TGP550 only)  
Description  
Value Range  
Selects whether calls arrive at the base unit for each line.  
Selected, Not selected  
Note  
You cannot clear all the check boxes including [Handset No.].  
Default Value  
Selected (all)  
3.7.1.2 Handset and Line No. selection for making calls  
Handset No.  
Description  
Indicates the handsets (1–6) that can be used to make a call (reference  
only).  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Not applicable.  
Not applicable.  
Base (KX-TGP550 only)  
Description  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Indicates the base unit that can be used to make a call (reference only).  
Not applicable.  
Not applicable.  
Line No.  
Description  
Selects which lines (1–8) can be seized when going off-hook to make  
a call for the base unit and each handset.  
100  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
                   
3.7.2 Call Control  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Selected, Not selected  
Note  
If you clear all the check boxes for the base unit and the  
handsets, calls cannot be made from either the base unit or the  
handsets.  
Selected (all)  
Default  
Description  
Selects which line to seize automatically when going off-hook to make  
a call for the base unit and each handset.  
Note  
If the line selected as [Default] is not selected as a line that can  
be seized for the corresponding base unit or handset in [Line  
No.], the unit cannot make a call.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
1–8  
1
3.7.2 Call Control  
This screen allows you to configure various call features that are common to all lines.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
101  
       
3.7.2 Call Control  
3.7.2.1 Call Control  
Send SUBSCRIBE to Voice Mail Server  
Description  
Selects whether to send the SUBSCRIBE request to a voice mail  
server.  
Note  
Your phone system must support voice mail.  
Value Range  
Yes  
No  
Default Value  
No  
Configuration File Reference  
Conference Server Address  
Description  
Specifies the URI for a conference server, which consists of a user part,  
the "@" symbol, and a host part, for example,  
Note  
Availability depends on your phone system.  
Value Range  
Max. 127 characters  
Default Value  
Not stored.  
Configuration File Reference  
Inter-digit Timeout  
Description  
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, within which subsequent digits  
of a dial number must be dialed. When this timer expires after the last  
key was pressed, dialing will start.  
Value Range  
3–10  
Default Value  
5
Configuration File Reference  
102  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
               
3.7.2 Call Control  
3.7.2.2 Emergency Call Phone Numbers  
1–5  
Description  
Specifies the phone numbers used for making emergency calls. A user  
can dial any of the specified phone numbers at any time regardless of  
any restrictions imposed on the unit. A maximum of 5 phone numbers  
can be specified.  
Note  
When a phone number is specified here, it will be prioritized  
over the setting specified in [Dial Plan] in 3.7.3.2 Dial Plan.  
Value Range  
Max. 24 characters  
Default Value  
Not stored.  
Configuration File Reference  
3.7.2.3 Call Rejection Phone Numbers  
1–30  
Description  
Specifies the phone numbers to reject incoming calls from. A maximum  
of 30 phone numbers can be specified.  
Note  
You can also configure this setting through the phone user  
interface. If these settings are changed through the phone user  
interface while being changed through the Web user interface,  
the settings made through the phone user interface will be  
overwritten by the settings made through the Web user  
interface.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Max. 24 characters  
Note  
Even if you specify nonconsecutive fields (e.g., fields 1, 5, and  
30), they will be rearranged into consecutive fields after you  
save the settings (i.e., 1, 2, and 3).  
Not stored.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
103  
               
3.7.3 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 8]  
3.7.3 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 8]  
This screen allows you to configure various call features that are specific to each line.  
3.7.3.1 Call Control  
Display Name  
Description  
Value Range  
Specifies the name to display as the caller on the other party’s phone  
when you make a call.  
Max. 16 characters or 32 bytes  
Note  
You can use Unicode characters for this setting.  
Default Value  
Not stored.  
Configuration File Reference  
Enable Privacy Mode  
Description  
Selects whether to enable privacy mode, which prohibits another  
handset or base unit from barging in on a conversation.  
104  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
             
3.7.3 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 8]  
Value Range  
Yes  
No  
Note  
If you select [Yes], the conversation cannot be interrupted by  
another handset or base unit. If you select [No], the  
conversation can be interrupted by another handset or base  
unit.  
Default Value  
Yes  
Configuration File Reference  
Voice Mail Access Number  
Description  
Specifies the phone number used to access the voice mail server.  
Note  
Your phone system must support voice mail.  
Value Range  
Max. 24 characters (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)  
Note  
No other characters are allowed.  
Default Value  
Not stored.  
Configuration File Reference  
Enable Shared Call  
Description  
Selects whether to enable the Shared Call feature of the SIP server,  
which is used to share one line among the units.  
Note  
You cannot set both [Enable Shared Call] and [Synchronize  
Do Not Disturb and Call Forward] to [Yes] at the same time.  
Availability depends on your phone system.  
Value Range  
Yes  
No  
Note  
If you select [Yes], the SIP server will control the line by using  
a shared-call signaling method. If you select [No], the SIP  
server will control the line by using a standard signaling method.  
Default Value  
No  
Configuration File Reference  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
105  
         
3.7.3 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 8]  
Unique ID of Shared Call  
Description  
Specifies the unique ID used by the SIP server when [Enable Shared  
Call] is set to [Yes].  
Value Range  
Max. 24 characters  
Default Value  
Not stored.  
Configuration File Reference  
Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward  
Description  
Selects whether to synchronize the Do Not Disturb and Call Forward  
settings, configured via the Web user interface or phone user interface,  
between the unit and the portal server that is provided by your phone  
system dealer.  
Note  
Even if you select [Yes], this feature may not function properly  
if your phone system does not support it. Before you configure  
this setting, consult your phone system dealer.  
You cannot set both [Enable Shared Call] and [Synchronize  
Do Not Disturb and Call Forward] to [Yes] at the same time.  
Value Range  
Yes  
No  
Default Value  
No  
Configuration File Reference  
3.7.3.2 Dial Plan  
Dial Plan  
Description  
Specifies a dial format, such as specific phone numbers, that control  
which numbers can be dialed or how to handle the call when making a  
call. For details, see 5.3 Dial Plan.  
Value Range  
Max. 500 characters  
Note  
Entering more than 500 characters in this field causes an error  
and the previous value remains effective.  
Default Value  
Not stored.  
Configuration File Reference  
106  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
                 
3.7.3 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 8]  
Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match  
Description  
Value Range  
Selects whether to make a call even if the dialed number does not  
match any of the dial formats specified in [Dial Plan].  
Yes  
No  
Note  
If you select [Yes], calls will be made even if the dialed number  
does not match the dial formats specified in [Dial Plan] (i.e.,  
dial plan filtering is disabled). If you select [No], calls will not be  
made if the dialed number does not match one of the dial  
formats specified in [Dial Plan] (i.e., dial plan filtering is  
enabled).  
Default Value  
Yes  
Configuration File Reference  
3.7.3.3 Call Features  
Block Caller ID  
Description  
Selects whether to make calls without transmitting the phone number  
to the called party.  
Note  
Availability depends on your phone system.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Yes  
No  
No  
Block Anonymous Call  
Description  
Selects whether to reject incoming calls that do not show the caller’s  
number.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Yes  
No  
No  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
107  
               
3.7.3 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 8]  
Do Not Disturb  
Description  
Selects whether to enable the Do Not Disturb feature for incoming calls.  
Note  
If Do Not Disturb has been enabled on the server, the server  
rejects incoming calls and the unit does not receive any calls,  
even if you have selected [No] for this setting.  
If you change this setting when [Synchronize Do Not Disturb  
and Call Forward] is set to [Yes], the change to this setting is  
not immediately applied on this screen. In this case, reload the  
screen to confirm that the change is applied.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Yes  
No  
No  
3.7.3.4 Call Forward  
Unconditional (Enable Call Forward)  
Description  
Selects whether to forward all incoming calls to a specified destination.  
Note  
If Do Not Disturb has been enabled on the server, the server  
rejects incoming calls and the unit does not receive any calls,  
even if you have selected [Yes] for this setting.  
If you have selected [Yes] for this setting and Call Forward has  
been enabled on the server, but the forwarding destinations  
differ, incoming calls are forwarded to the destination set on the  
server.  
If Call Forward has been enabled on the server, incoming calls  
are forwarded to the destination set on the server, even if you  
have selected [No] for this setting.  
You can synchronize the Do Not Disturb and Call Forward  
settings from the Web user interface (® see [Synchronize Do  
Not Disturb and Call Forward] in 3.7.3.1 Call Control) or  
through configuration file programming (® see  
"SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_[1–8]" in 4.7.1 Call Control  
If you change this setting when [Synchronize Do Not Disturb  
and Call Forward] is set to [Yes], the change to this setting is  
not immediately applied on this screen. In this case, reload the  
screen to confirm that the change is applied.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Yes  
No  
No  
108  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
           
3.7.3 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 8]  
Unconditional (Phone Number)  
Description  
Specifies the phone number of the destination to forward all incoming  
calls to.  
Note  
If you change this setting when [Synchronize Do Not Disturb  
and Call Forward] is set to [Yes], the change to this setting is  
not immediately applied on this screen. In this case, reload the  
screen to confirm that the change is applied.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Max. 24 characters  
Note  
You cannot leave this field empty if [Unconditional (Enable  
Call Forward)] is set to [Yes].  
Not stored.  
Busy (Enable Call Forward)  
Description  
Selects whether to forward incoming calls to a specified destination  
when the line is in use.  
Note  
If Do Not Disturb has been enabled on the server, the server  
rejects incoming calls and the unit does not receive any calls,  
even if you have selected [Yes] for this setting.  
If you have selected [Yes] for this setting and Call Forward has  
been enabled on the server, but the forwarding destinations  
differ, incoming calls are forwarded to the destination set on the  
server.  
If Call Forward has been enabled on the server, incoming calls  
are forwarded to the destination set on the server, even if you  
have selected [No] for this setting.  
You can synchronize the Do Not Disturb and Call Forward  
settings from the Web user interface (® see [Synchronize Do  
Not Disturb and Call Forward] in 3.7.3.1 Call Control) or  
through configuration file programming (® see  
"SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_[1–8]" in 4.7.1 Call Control  
If you change this setting when [Synchronize Do Not Disturb  
and Call Forward] is set to [Yes], the change to this setting is  
not immediately applied on this screen. In this case, reload the  
screen to confirm that the change is applied.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Yes  
No  
No  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
109  
           
3.7.3 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 8]  
Busy (Phone Number)  
Description  
Specifies the phone number of the destination to forward calls to when  
the line is in use.  
Note  
If you change this setting when [Synchronize Do Not Disturb  
and Call Forward] is set to [Yes], the change to this setting is  
not immediately applied on this screen. In this case, reload the  
screen to confirm that the change is applied.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Max. 24 characters  
Note  
You cannot leave this field empty if [Busy (Enable Call  
Forward)] is set to [Yes].  
Not stored.  
No Answer (Enable Call Forward)  
Description  
Selects whether to forward incoming calls to a specified destination  
when a call is not answered after it has rung a specified number of  
times.  
Note  
If Do Not Disturb has been enabled on the server, the server  
rejects incoming calls and the unit does not receive any calls,  
even if you have selected [Yes] for this setting.  
If you have selected [Yes] for this setting and Call Forward has  
been enabled on the server, but the forwarding destinations  
differ, incoming calls are forwarded to the destination set on the  
server.  
If Call Forward has been enabled on the server, incoming calls  
are forwarded to the destination set on the server, even if you  
have selected [No] for this setting.  
You can synchronize the Do Not Disturb and Call Forward from  
the Web user interface (® see [Synchronize Do Not Disturb  
and Call Forward] in 3.7.3.1 Call Control) or through  
configuration file programming (® see  
"SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_[1–8]" in 4.7.1 Call Control  
If you change this setting when [Synchronize Do Not Disturb  
and Call Forward] is set to [Yes], the change to this setting is  
not immediately applied on this screen. In this case, reload the  
screen to confirm that the change is applied.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Yes  
No  
No  
110  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
           
3.7.3 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 8]  
No Answer (Phone Number)  
Description  
Specifies the phone number of the destination to forward calls to when  
a call is not answered after it has rung a specified number of times.  
Note  
If you change this setting when [Synchronize Do Not Disturb  
and Call Forward] is set to [Yes], the change to this setting is  
not immediately applied on this screen. In this case, reload the  
screen to confirm that the change is applied.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Max. 24 characters  
Note  
You cannot leave this field empty if [No Answer (Enable Call  
Forward)] is set to [Yes].  
Not stored.  
No Answer (Ring Count)  
Description  
Specifies the number of times that an incoming call rings until the call  
is forwarded.  
Note  
If you change this setting when [Synchronize Do Not Disturb  
and Call Forward] is set to [Yes], the change to this setting is  
not immediately applied on this screen. In this case, reload the  
screen to confirm that the change is applied.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
0, 2–20 (0: No ring)  
3
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
111  
       
3.7.4 Tone Settings  
3.7.4 Tone Settings  
This screen allows you to configure the dual-tone frequencies and ring tone patterns of each tone.  
3.7.4.1 Dial Tone  
Tone Frequencies  
Description  
Value Range  
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of dial tones using 2 whole  
numbers separated by a comma.  
0, 200–1000 (0: No tone)  
Note  
If the value for this setting is "350,440", the unit will use a mixed  
signal of a 350 Hz tone and a 440 Hz tone.  
Default Value  
350,440  
Configuration File Reference  
Tone Timings  
Description  
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of dial tones using 4 whole  
numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2) separated by commas.  
112  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
               
3.7.4 Tone Settings  
Value Range  
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)  
Note  
The unit will play the tone for the duration of the first value, stop  
it for the duration of the second value, play it for the duration of  
the third value, and then stop it for the duration of the last value.  
The whole sequence will then repeat. For example, if the value  
for this setting is "100,100,0,0", the unit will play the tone for 100  
ms, stop it for 100 ms, and then play it continuously.  
Default Value  
0,0,0,0 (The unit plays the dial tone continuously.)  
Configuration File Reference  
3.7.4.2 Busy Tone  
Tone Frequencies  
Description  
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of busy tones using 2  
whole numbers separated by a comma.  
Value Range  
0, 200–1000 (0: No tone)  
480,620  
Default Value  
Configuration File Reference  
Tone Timings  
Description  
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of busy tones using 4 whole  
numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2) separated by commas.  
Value Range  
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)  
500,500,500,500  
Default Value  
Configuration File Reference  
3.7.4.3 Ringing Tone  
Tone Frequencies  
Description  
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of ringback tones using 2  
whole numbers separated by a comma.  
Value Range  
0, 200–1000 (0: No tone)  
440,480  
Default Value  
Configuration File Reference  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
113  
                 
3.7.4 Tone Settings  
Tone Timings  
Description  
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of ringback tones using 4 whole  
numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2) separated by commas.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)  
2000,4000,2000,4000  
Configuration File Reference  
3.7.4.4 Stutter Tone  
Tone Frequencies  
Description  
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of stutter dial tones to  
notify that a voice mail is waiting, using 2 whole numbers separated by  
a comma.  
Value Range  
0, 200–1000 (0: No tone)  
350,440  
Default Value  
Configuration File Reference  
Tone Timings  
Description  
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of stutter dial tones to notify that  
a voice mail is waiting, using 22 whole numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2,  
…, on 11, off 11) separated by commas.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)  
100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,  
100,100,100,100,100,100,100,0,0  
Configuration File Reference  
3.7.4.5 Reorder Tone  
Tone Frequencies  
Description  
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of reorder tones using 2  
whole numbers separated by a comma.  
Value Range  
0, 200–1000 (0: No tone)  
480,620  
Default Value  
Configuration File Reference  
114  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
                   
3.7.5 Import Phonebook  
Tone Timings  
Description  
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of reorder tones using 8 whole  
numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2, on 3, off 3, on 4, off 4) separated by  
commas.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)  
250,250,250,250,250,250,250,250  
Configuration File Reference  
3.7.4.6 Howler Tone  
Tone Frequencies  
Description  
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of howler tones (i.e., alarm  
tones) using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma.  
Value Range  
0, 200–3000 (0: No tone)  
1400,2060  
Default Value  
Configuration File Reference  
Tone Timings  
Description  
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of howler tones (i.e., alarm tones)  
using 4 whole numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2) separated by commas.  
Value Range  
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)  
Default Value  
100,100,100,100  
Configuration File Reference  
Start Time  
Description  
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that busy or reorder tones play  
until they switch to howler tones.  
Value Range  
0–120 (0: Disable)  
Default Value  
30  
Configuration File Reference  
3.7.5 Import Phonebook  
This screen allows you to import phonebook data from a PC to the specified unit. For details, see 5.2.1 Import/  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
115  
                     
3.7.5 Import Phonebook  
Note  
If the existing phonebook data has an entry with the same name and phone number as an imported  
entry, the imported entry is not added as a new entry. The import is still successful, and the  
message "Complete" will be displayed.  
When you begin transferring the phonebook data, the "Now Processing File Data" screen is displayed,  
and the screen is periodically reloaded. Depending on your Web browser, the screen might not reload  
automatically, and you will need to click the text "HERE" before the timer expires in order for the import  
operation to function properly.  
3.7.5.1 Import Phonebook  
Handset (or Base Unit)  
Description  
Selects the handset or base unit to import the phonebook entries to.  
Value Range  
Handset 1  
Handset 2  
Handset 3  
Handset 4  
Handset 5  
Handset 6  
Base Unit (KX-TGP550 only)  
Default Value  
Handset 1  
File Name  
Description  
Value Range  
Specifies the path of the TSV (Tab-separated Value) file to import from  
the PC.  
No limitation  
Note  
There are no limitations for the field entry. However, it is  
recommended that paths of less than 256 characters be used:  
longer paths may cause longer data transfer times and result in  
an internal error.  
116  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
             
3.7.6 Export Phonebook  
Default Value  
Not stored.  
3.7.6 Export Phonebook  
This screen allows you to save the phonebook data stored in the unit as a TSV file on a PC. For details, see  
Note  
When you begin transferring the phonebook data, the "Now Processing File Data" screen is displayed,  
and the screen is periodically reloaded. Click the text "HERE" in the message to display the [Export  
Phonebook] screen again. If you do not, the "Now Processing File Data" screen remains displayed  
even if the export is complete. Depending on your Web browser, the screen might not reload  
automatically, and you will need to click the text "HERE" before the timer expires in order for the export  
operation to function properly.  
Depending on the security settings of your Web browser, pop-up menus might be blocked at the time  
of export. The security warning window may be displayed on another screen even if the Pop-up  
Blocker settings are set to enable, and the file may not be exported successfully. In this case, try the  
export operation again or disable the Pop-up Blocker feature of your Web browser.  
3.7.6.1 Export Phonebook  
Handset (or Base Unit)  
Description  
Selects the handset or base unit to export the phonebook data from.  
Value Range  
Handset 1  
Handset 2  
Handset 3  
Handset 4  
Handset 5  
Handset 6  
Base Unit (KX-TGP550 only)  
Default Value  
Handset 1  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
117  
           
3.8.1 Firmware Maintenance  
3.8 Maintenance  
This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the [Maintenance] tab.  
3.8.1 Firmware Maintenance  
This screen allows you to perform firmware updates automatically or manually.  
3.8.1.1 Firmware Maintenance  
Enable Firmware Update  
Description  
Selects whether to perform firmware updates when the unit detects a  
newer version of firmware.  
Note  
Changing this setting may require restarting the unit.  
Local firmware updates from the Web user interface (® see  
3.8.2 Local Firmware Update) can be performed regardless  
of this setting.  
Value Range  
Yes  
No  
Default Value  
Yes  
Configuration File Reference  
Update Type  
Description  
Selects whether to display a confirmation message asking the user to  
perform a firmware update (manual) or perform the firmware update  
without asking the user (automatic) when the unit detects a newer  
version of firmware.  
Note  
This setting is available only when [Enable Firmware  
Update] is set to [Yes].  
Changing this setting may require restarting the unit.  
118  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
                   
3.8.2 Local Firmware Update  
Value Range  
Automatic  
Manual  
Default Value  
Automatic  
Configuration File Reference  
Firmware File URL  
Description  
Specifies the URL where the firmware file is stored.  
Note  
This setting is available only when [Enable Firmware  
Update] is set to [Yes].  
Changing this setting may require restarting the unit.  
Value Range  
Max. 255 characters  
Not stored.  
Default Value  
Configuration File Reference  
3.8.2 Local Firmware Update  
This screen allows you to manually update the unit’s firmware from a PC by clicking [Update Firmware].  
Note  
After the firmware has been successfully updated, the base unit will restart automatically.  
3.8.2.1 Local Firmware Update  
Encryption  
Description  
Value Range  
Selects whether the firmware files are encrypted or not.  
Yes  
No  
Default Value  
Yes  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
119  
               
3.8.3 Provisioning Maintenance  
File Name  
Description  
Value Range  
Specifies the path of the firmware file to be imported.  
No limitation  
Note  
There are no limitations for the field entry. However, it is  
recommended that paths of less than 256 characters be used:  
longer paths may cause longer data transfer times and result in  
an internal error.  
Default Value  
Not stored.  
3.8.3 Provisioning Maintenance  
This screen allows you to change the provisioning setup to download the configuration files from the  
provisioning server of your phone system.  
Note  
Each unit can accept up to 3 configuration files. For details about provisioning, see  
3.8.3.1 Provisioning Maintenance  
Enable Provisioning  
Description  
Value Range  
Selects whether the unit is automatically configured by downloading the  
configuration files from the provisioning server of your phone system.  
Yes  
No  
Default Value  
Yes  
Configuration File Reference  
120  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
             
3.8.3 Provisioning Maintenance  
Standard File URL  
Description  
Specifies the URL of the standard configuration file, which is used when  
every unit needs different settings.  
Note  
When you change this setting, set [Enable Provisioning] to  
[Yes] at the same time.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Max. 255 characters  
Not stored.  
Note  
The URL specified by your phone system dealer may be preset  
in the unit.  
Configuration File Reference  
Product File URL  
Description  
Specifies the URL of the product configuration file, which is used when  
all units with the same model number need the same settings.  
Note  
When you change this setting, set [Enable Provisioning] to  
[Yes] at the same time.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Max. 255 characters  
Not stored.  
Note  
The URL specified by your phone system dealer may be preset  
in the unit.  
Configuration File Reference  
Master File URL  
Description  
Specifies the URL of the master configuration file, which is used when  
all units need the same settings.  
Note  
When you change this setting, set [Enable Provisioning] to  
[Yes] at the same time.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Max. 255 characters  
Not stored.  
Note  
The URL specified by your phone system dealer may be preset  
in the unit.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
121  
                 
3.8.4 Reset to Defaults  
Configuration File Reference  
Cyclic Auto Resync  
Description  
Selects whether the unit periodically checks for updates of configuration  
files.  
Value Range  
Yes  
No  
Default Value  
No  
Configuration File Reference  
Resync Interval  
Description  
Specifies the interval, in minutes, between periodic checks for updates  
of the configuration files.  
Value Range  
1–40320  
Default Value  
10080  
Configuration File Reference  
Header Value for Resync Event  
Description  
Specifies the value of the "Event" header sent from the SIP server to  
the unit so that the unit can access the configuration files on the  
provisioning server.  
Value Range  
Max. 15 characters  
Note  
If the value for this setting is any value other than an empty  
string (typically "check-sync" or "resync" is set), the unit will  
access the configuration files on the provisioning server when  
the SIP server sends an event to notify the unit.  
If the value for this setting is an empty string, the unit will not  
access the configuration files on the provisioning server even if  
the unit receives a synchronization notification of an event.  
Default Value  
check-sync  
Configuration File Reference  
3.8.4 Reset to Defaults  
This screen allows you to reset the settings made through the Web user interface to their default values by  
clicking [Reset Web Settings]. After you click this button, a dialog box is displayed, asking whether you want  
to reset the settings. Click OK to reset, or Cancel not to. For details about the reset, see 1.2.1.2 Resetting  
122  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
                 
3.8.5 Restart  
Notice  
After resetting the settings, the base unit will restart even if it is being accessed through the phone user  
interface, or on calls.  
Note  
If you have changed the default password for the Administrator account and successfully reset the  
settings (the message "Complete" is displayed), the next time you access the Web user interface, the  
authentication dialog box appears.  
3.8.5 Restart  
This screen allows you to restart the base unit by clicking [Restart]. After you click this button, a dialog box is  
displayed, asking whether you want to restart the base unit. Click OK to perform a restart, or Cancel not to.  
Notice  
The base unit will restart even if it is being accessed through the phone user interface, or on calls.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
123  
     
3.8.5 Restart  
124  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Section 4  
Configuration File Programming  
This section provides information about the  
configuration parameters used in the configuration files.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
125  
   
4.1 Configuration File Parameter List  
4.1 Configuration File Parameter List  
The following tables show all the parameters that can be programmed using configuration file programming.  
For details about each parameter, see the reference pages listed.  
System Settings  
Category  
Parameter Name  
Ref.  
ADMIN_ID  
Login Account Settings  
ADMIN_PASS*1  
USER_ID  
USER_PASS*1  
TIME_ZONE*1  
DST_ENABLE*1  
DST_OFFSET*1  
System Time Settings  
DST_START_MONTH*1  
DST_START_ORDINAL_DAY*1  
DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK*1  
DST_START_TIME*1  
DST_STOP_MONTH*1  
DST_STOP_ORDINAL_DAY*1  
DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK*1  
DST_STOP_TIME*1  
SYSLOG_EVENT_SIP  
SYSLOG_EVENT_CFG  
SYSLOG_EVENT_VOIP  
SYSLOG_EVENT_TEL  
SYSLOG_ADDR  
Syslog Settings  
SYSLOG_PORT  
SYSLOG_RTPSMLY_INTVL_[1–8]  
Firmware Update Settings  
FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE*1  
FIRM_VER_EUDECT  
FIRM_VER_USDECT  
FIRM_UPGRADE_AUTO*1  
FIRM_FILE_PATH*1  
126  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
             
4.1 Configuration File Parameter List  
Category  
Parameter Name  
Ref.  
OPTION66_ENABLE  
Provisioning Settings  
PROVISION_ENABLE*1  
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH*1  
CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH*1  
CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH*1  
CFG_FILE_KEY1  
CFG_FILE_KEY2  
CFG_FILE_KEY3  
CFG_FILE_KEY_LENGTH  
CFG_CYCLIC*1  
CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL*1  
CFG_RTRY_INTVL  
CFG_RESYNC_TIME  
CFG_RESYNC_FROM_SIP*1  
*1  
This setting can also be configured through the Web user interface.  
Network Settings  
Category  
Parameter Name  
CONNECTION_TYPE*1  
Ref.  
IP Settings  
HOST_NAME*2  
DHCP_DNS_ENABLE*1  
STATIC_IP_ADDRESS*1  
STATIC_SUBNET*1  
STATIC_GATEWAY*1  
USER_DNS1_ADDR*1  
USER_DNS2_ADDR*1  
DNS_QRY_PRLL  
DNS_PRIORITY  
DNS1_ADDR  
DNS Settings  
DNS2_ADDR  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
127  
         
4.1 Configuration File Parameter List  
Category  
Parameter Name  
Ref.  
Ethernet Port Settings  
VLAN_ENABLE*1  
VLAN_ID_IP_PHONE*1  
VLAN_PRI_IP_PHONE*1  
VLAN_ID_PC*1  
VLAN_PRI_PC*1  
HTTP Settings  
HTTP_VER*2  
HTTP_USER_AGENT*2  
HTTP_SSL_VERIFY  
CFG_ROOT_CERTIFICATE_PATH  
Time Adjust Settings  
STUN Settings  
NTP_ADDR*2  
TIME_SYNC_INTVL  
TIME_QUERY_INTVL*2  
STUN_SERV_ADDR*2  
STUN_SERV_PORT*2  
STUN_2NDSERV_ADDR  
STUN_2NDSERV_PORT  
NW_SETTING_ENABLE  
CUSTOM_WEB_PAGE  
Miscellaneous Network Settings  
*1  
This setting can also be configured through other programming methods (phone user interface programming or Web user interface  
programming).  
*2  
This setting can also be configured through the Web user interface.  
Telephone Settings  
Category  
Parameter Name  
Ref.  
Call Control Settings  
CONFERENCE_SERVER_ADDRESS*1  
EMERGENCY_CALL[1–5]*1  
FIRSTDIGIT_TIM  
INTDIGIT_TIM*1  
VM_SUBSCRIBE_ENABLE*1  
128  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
                 
4.1 Configuration File Parameter List  
Category  
Tone Settings  
Parameter Name  
Ref.  
DIAL_TONE_FRQ*1  
DIAL_TONE_TIMING*1  
BUSY_TONE_FRQ*1  
BUSY_TONE_TIMING*1  
RINGING_TONE_FRQ*1  
RINGING_TONE_TIMING*1  
STT_TONE_FRQ*1  
STT_TONE_TIMING*1  
REORDER_TONE_FRQ*1  
REORDER_TONE_TIMING*1  
HOWLER_TONE_FRQ*1  
HOWLER_TONE_TIMING*1  
HOWLER_START_TIME*1  
BELL_CORE_PATTERN1_TIMING  
BELL_CORE_PATTERN2_TIMING  
BELL_CORE_PATTERN3_TIMING  
BELL_CORE_PATTERN4_TIMING  
BELL_CORE_PATTERN5_TIMING  
*1  
This setting can also be configured through the Web user interface.  
VoIP Settings  
Category  
Parameter Name  
SDP_CODEC[0–4]_[1–8]*1  
Ref.  
Codec Settings  
SDP_CKRTE[0–4]_[1–8]  
SDP_PARAM[0–4]_[1–8]  
SDP_PTYPE[0–4]_[1–8]  
CODEC_G711_REQ  
CODEC_G729_PARAM  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
129  
       
4.1 Configuration File Parameter List  
Category  
Parameter Name  
TOS_RTP_[1–8]*1  
Ref.  
RTP Settings  
RTCP_INTVL_[1–8]*1  
MAX_DELAY_[1–8]*1  
MIN_DELAY_[1–8]*1  
NOM_DELAY_[1–8]*1  
RTP_PORT_MIN*1  
RTP_PORT_MAX*1  
RTP_PTIME*1  
Miscellaneous VoIP Settings  
OUTBANDDTMF_[1–8]*1  
TELEVENT_PTYPE_[1–8]*1  
RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_[1–8]*1  
*1  
This setting can also be configured through the Web user interface.  
Line Settings  
Category  
Parameter Name  
VM_NUMBER_[1–8]*1  
Ref.  
Call Control Settings  
DIAL_PLAN_[1–8]*1  
DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_[1–8]*1  
SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_[1–8]*1  
SHARED_USER_ID_[1–8]*1  
SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_[1–8]*1  
PRIVACY_MODE_[1–8]*1  
SIP_USER_AGENT*1  
SIP Settings  
SIP_AUTHID_[1–8]*1  
SIP_PASS_[1–8]*1  
SIP_SRC_PORT_[1–8]*1  
SIP_PRXY_ADDR_[1–8]*1  
SIP_PRXY_PORT_[1–8]*1  
SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_[1–8]*1  
SIP_RGSTR_PORT_[1–8]*1  
SIP_SVCDOMAIN_[1–8]*1  
REG_EXPIRE_TIME_[1–8]  
130  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
           
4.1 Configuration File Parameter List  
Category  
Parameter Name  
Ref.  
REG_INTERVAL_RATE_[1–8]  
SIP_SESSION_TIME_[1–8]*1  
TOS_SIP_[1–8]*1  
SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR_[1–8]  
SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_[1–8]  
SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_[1–8]  
SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_[1–8]  
SIP_TIMER_T1_[1–8]*1  
SIP_TIMER_T2_[1–8]*1  
INVITE_RTXN_[1–8]*1  
OTHER_RTXN_[1–8]*1  
SIP_FOVR_NORSP_[1–8]  
SIP_FOVR_MAX_[1–8]  
SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_[1–8]*1  
SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_[1–8]*1  
SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_[1–8]*1  
SIP_100REL_ENABLE_[1–8]*1  
SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_[1–8]  
SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_[1–8]*1  
SIP_PRSNC_PORT_[1–8]*1  
SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_[1–8]  
SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_[1–8]  
USE_DEL_REG_OPEN_[1–8]  
USE_DEL_REG_CLOSE_[1–8]  
PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_[1–8]*1  
SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_[1–8]  
SUB_RTX_INTVL_[1–8]  
REG_RTX_INTVL_[1–8]  
SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_[1–8]  
SIP_PRIVACY_[1–8]  
ADD_USER_PHONE_[1–8]  
SDP_USER_ID_[1–8]  
SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_[1–8]  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
131  
4.2.1 Configuration File Specifications  
Category  
Parameter Name  
Ref.  
SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_[1–8]*1  
SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_[1–8]*1  
SIP_TRANSPORT_[1–8]*1  
SIP_ANM_DISPNAME_[1–8]  
SIP_ANM_USERNAME_[1–8]  
SIP_ANM_HOSTNAME_[1–8]  
SIP_DETECT_SSAF_[1–8]*1  
PHONE_NUMBER_[1–8]*1  
DISPLAY_NAME_[1–8]*1  
INTERNATIONAL_ACCESS_CODE  
*1  
This setting can also be configured through the Web user interface.  
4.2 General Information on the Configuration Files  
4.2.1 Configuration File Specifications  
The specifications of the configuration files are as follows:  
File Format  
The configuration file is in plain text format.  
File Size  
The maximum size of a configuration file is 32,768 bytes. Regardless of the number of configuration files, the  
total size of the configuration files must be 32,768 bytes or less.  
Lines in Configuration Files  
A configuration file consists of a sequence of lines, with the following conditions:  
Each line must end with "<CR><LF>".  
The maximum length of a line is 537 bytes including "<CR><LF>".  
The following lines are ignored:  
Lines that exceed the limit of 537 bytes  
Empty lines  
Comment lines that start with "#"  
Configuration files must start with a comment line containing the following designated character sequence  
(28 bytes):  
# PCC Standard Format File #  
The hexadecimal notation of this sequence is:  
23 20 50 43 43 20 53 74 61 6E 64 61 72 64 20 46  
6F 72 6D 61 74 20 46 69 6C 65 20 22  
To prevent the designated character sequence being altered by chance, it is recommended that the  
configuration file starts with the comment line shown below:  
# PCC Standard Format File # DO NOT CHANGE THIS LINE!  
132  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
         
4.2.2 Configuration File Parameters  
Configuration files must end with an empty line.  
Each parameter line is written in the form of XXX="yyy" (XXX: parameter name, yyy: parameter value).  
The value must be enclosed by double quotation marks.  
A parameter line written over multiple lines is not allowed. It will cause an error on the configuration file,  
resulting in invalid provisioning.  
Configuration Parameters  
Both the KX-TGP500 and KX-TGP550 support multiple telephone lines. For some parameters, the value  
for each line must be specified independently. A parameter name with the suffix "_1" is the parameter for  
line 1; "_2" for line 2, and so on.  
Examples of setting the line (phone number) for accessing a voice mail server:  
"VM_NUMBER_1": for line 1,  
"VM_NUMBER_2": for line 2, …,  
"VM_NUMBER_8": for line 8  
The maximum length of a parameter name is 32 characters.  
The maximum length of a parameter value is 500 characters excluding double quotation marks.  
No space characters are allowed in the line except when the value includes a space character(s).  
Example:  
DISPLAY_NAME_1="John Smith"(valid)  
DISPLAY_NAME_1 = "John Smith"(invalid)  
Some parameter values can be specified as "empty" to set the parameter values to empty.  
Example:  
NTP_ADDR=""  
The parameters have no order.  
If the same parameter is specified in a configuration file more than once, the value specified first is applied.  
All configurable settings can be specified in the configuration file. You can ignore settings that already have  
the desired values. Only change parameters as necessary.  
Note  
For examples of configuration files, see Section 8 Configuration File Examples.  
4.2.2 Configuration File Parameters  
The information on each parameter that can be written in a configuration file is shown in the tables below. The  
information includes parameter name (as the title of the table), value format, description, permitted value range,  
default value of each parameter, phone user interface reference, and Web user interface reference.  
Parameter Name  
This is the system-predefined parameter name and cannot be changed.  
Value Format  
Each parameter value is categorized into Integer, Boolean, or String. Some parameters require a composite  
form such as "Comma-separated Integer" or "Comma-separated String".  
Integer: a numerical value, described as a sequence of numerical characters, optionally preceded by  
a "-" (minus)  
An empty string is not allowed.  
Boolean: "Y" or "N"  
String: sequence of alphanumerical characters  
For details about available characters, see 4.2.3 Characters Available for String Values.  
Comma-separated Integer: a list of integers, separated by commas  
No space characters are allowed.  
Comma-separated String: a list of strings, separated by commas  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
133  
   
4.3.1 Login Account Settings  
No space characters are allowed.  
Description  
Describes the details of the parameter.  
Value Range  
Indicates the permitted value range of the parameter.  
Default Value  
Indicates the factory default value of the parameter.  
Actual default values may vary depending on your phone system dealer.  
Phone User Interface Reference  
Provides the reference page of the corresponding parameter in phone user interface programming.  
Web User Interface Reference  
Provides the reference page of the corresponding parameter in Web user interface programming.  
4.2.3 Characters Available for String Values  
Unless noted otherwise in "Value Range", only ASCII characters can be used for parameter values. Unicode  
characters can also be used in some parameter values.  
Available ASCII characters are shown on a white background in the following table:  
4.3 System Settings  
4.3.1 Login Account Settings  
ADMIN_ID  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the account ID used to access the Web user interface with  
the Administrator account.  
134  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
               
4.3.1 Login Account Settings  
Value Range  
Max. 16 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)  
Note  
An empty string is not allowed.  
Default Value  
admin  
ADMIN_PASS  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the password to use to authenticate the Administrator account  
when logging in to the Web user interface.  
Value Range  
6–16 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)  
adminpass  
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
USER_ID  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the account ID used to access the Web user interface with  
the User account.  
Value Range  
Max. 16 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)  
Note  
An empty string is not allowed.  
Default Value  
user  
USER_PASS  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the password to use to authenticate the User account when  
logging in to the Web user interface.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
6–16 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)  
Empty string (only before a user accesses the Web user interface for  
the first time)  
Web User Interface Reference  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
135  
           
4.3.2 System Time Settings  
4.3.2 System Time Settings  
TIME_ZONE  
Value Format  
Description  
Value Range  
Integer  
Specifies the offset of local standard time from UTC (GMT), in minutes.  
-720–780  
Note  
Only the following values are available:  
-720 (GMT -12:00), -660 (GMT -11:00), -600 (GMT -10:00),  
-540 (GMT -09:00), -480 (GMT -08:00), -420 (GMT -07:00),  
-360 (GMT -06:00), -300 (GMT -05:00), -240 (GMT -04:00),  
-210 (GMT -03:30), -180 (GMT -03:00), -120 (GMT -02:00), -60  
(GMT -01:00), 0 (GMT), 60 (GMT +01:00), 120 (GMT +02:00),  
180 (GMT +03:00), 210 (GMT +03:30), 240 (GMT +04:00), 270  
(GMT +04:30), 300 (GMT +05:00), 330 (GMT +05:30), 345  
(GMT +05:45), 360 (GMT +06:00), 390 (GMT +06:30), 420  
(GMT +07:00), 480 (GMT +08:00), 540 (GMT +09:00), 570  
(GMT +09:30), 600 (GMT +10:00), 660 (GMT +11:00), 720  
(GMT +12:00), 780 (GMT +13:00)  
If your location is west of Greenwich (0 [GMT]), the value should  
be minus. For example, the value for New York City, U.S.A. is  
"-300" (Eastern Standard Time being 5 hours behind GMT).  
Default Value  
0
Web User Interface Reference  
DST_ENABLE  
Value Format  
Description  
Value Range  
Boolean  
Specifies whether to enable DST (Summer Time).  
Y(Enable DST [Summer Time])  
N(Disable DST [Summer Time])  
N
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
DST_OFFSET  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the amount of time, in minutes, to change the time when  
"DST_ENABLE" is set to "Y".  
136  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
               
4.3.2 System Time Settings  
Value Range  
0–720  
Note  
This parameter is usually set to "60".  
Default Value  
60  
Web User Interface Reference  
DST_START_MONTH  
Value Format  
Integer  
Description  
Specifies the month in which DST (Summer Time) starts.  
Value Range  
1–12  
Default Value  
3
Web User Interface Reference  
DST_START_ORDINAL_DAY  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the number of the week on which DST (Summer Time) starts.  
The actual start day is specified in "DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK". For  
example, to specify the second Sunday, specify "2" in this parameter,  
and "0" in the next parameter.  
Value Range  
1–5  
1: the first week of the month  
2: the second week of the month  
3: the third week of the month  
4: the fourth week of the month  
5: the fifth week of the month  
Default Value  
2
Web User Interface Reference  
DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the day of the week on which DST (Summer Time) starts.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
137  
           
4.3.2 System Time Settings  
Value Range  
0–6  
0: Sunday  
1: Monday  
2: Tuesday  
3: Wednesday  
4: Thursday  
5: Friday  
6: Saturday  
Default Value  
0
Web User Interface Reference  
DST_START_TIME  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the start time of DST (Summer Time) in minutes after 12:00  
AM.  
Value Range  
0–1439  
Default Value  
120  
Web User Interface Reference  
DST_STOP_MONTH  
Value Format  
Integer  
Description  
Specifies the month in which DST (Summer Time) ends.  
Value Range  
1–12  
Default Value  
10  
Web User Interface Reference  
DST_STOP_ORDINAL_DAY  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the number of the week on which DST (Summer Time) ends.  
The actual end day is specified in "DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK". For  
example, to specify the second Sunday, specify "2" in this parameter,  
and "0" in the next parameter.  
Value Range  
1–5  
1: the first week of the month  
2: the second week of the month  
3: the third week of the month  
4: the fourth week of the month  
5: the fifth week of the month  
138  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
           
4.3.3 Syslog Settings  
Default Value  
2
Web User Interface Reference  
DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK  
Value Format  
Description  
Value Range  
Integer  
Specifies the day of the week on which DST (Summer Time) ends.  
0–6  
0: Sunday  
1: Monday  
2: Tuesday  
3: Wednesday  
4: Thursday  
5: Friday  
6: Saturday  
Default Value  
0
Web User Interface Reference  
DST_STOP_TIME  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the end time of DST (Summer Time) in minutes after 12:00  
AM.  
Value Range  
0–1439  
Default Value  
120  
Web User Interface Reference  
4.3.3 Syslog Settings  
SYSLOG_EVENT_SIP  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies which SIP-related syslog events are sent to the syslog server.  
Note  
If the level of the event is higher than or equal to the set value,  
the log is sent to the syslog server.  
This setting is not applicable for the current version. No logs will  
be sent to the syslog server, even if values "1–6" are specified.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
139  
               
4.3.3 Syslog Settings  
Value Range  
0–6  
0: no logs sent  
1: emergency (highest)  
2: alert  
3: critical  
4: error  
5: warning  
6: information (lowest)  
Default Value  
0
SYSLOG_EVENT_CFG  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the threshold of syslog events regarding configuration.  
Note  
This setting is not applicable for the current version. No logs will  
be sent to the syslog server, even if values "1–6" are specified.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
0–6  
0
SYSLOG_EVENT_VOIP  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the threshold of syslog events regarding VoIP operation.  
Note  
This setting is not applicable for the current version. No logs will  
be sent to the syslog server, even if values "1–6" are specified.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
0–6  
0
SYSLOG_EVENT_TEL  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the threshold of syslog events regarding telephone functions.  
Note  
This setting is not applicable for the current version. No logs will  
be sent to the syslog server, even if values "1–6" are specified.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
0–6  
0
140  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
           
4.3.4 Firmware Update Settings  
SYSLOG_ADDR  
Value Format  
Description  
Value Range  
Default Value  
String  
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the syslog server.  
Max. 127 characters (IP address in dotted-decimal notation or FQDN)  
Empty string  
SYSLOG_PORT  
Value Format  
Description  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Integer  
Specifies the port number of the syslog server.  
1–65535  
514  
SYSLOG_RTPSMLY_INTVL_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SYSLOG_RTPSMLY_INTVL_1, SYSLOG_RTPSMLY_INTVL_2, …,  
SYSLOG_RTPSMLY_INTVL_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the interval, in seconds, to send summarized information of  
RTP packets to the syslog server.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
0, 5–65535 (0: No information sent)  
20  
4.3.4 Firmware Update Settings  
FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE  
Value Format  
Description  
Boolean  
Specifies whether to perform firmware updates when the unit detects a  
newer version of firmware.  
Note  
Changing this setting may require restarting the unit.  
Local firmware updates from the Web user interface (® see  
3.8.2 Local Firmware Update) can be performed regardless  
of this setting.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Y(Enable firmware updates)  
N(Disable firmware updates)  
Y
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
141  
                   
4.3.4 Firmware Update Settings  
Web User Interface Reference  
FIRM_VER_EUDECT  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the firmware version of the DECT system.  
Note  
DECT is a widely used cordless phone system in Europe.  
Changing this setting may require restarting the unit.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Max. 5 characters ("nn.nn" [n=0–9])  
00.00  
FIRM_VER_USDECT  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the firmware version of the DECT 6.0 system.  
Note  
DECT 6.0 is a widely used cordless phone system in North  
America.  
Changing this setting may require restarting the unit.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Max. 5 characters ("nn.nn" [n=0–9])  
00.00  
FIRM_UPGRADE_AUTO  
Value Format  
Description  
Boolean  
Specifies whether to display a confirmation message asking the user  
to perform a firmware update (manual) or perform the firmware update  
without asking the user (automatic) when the unit detects a newer  
version of firmware.  
Note  
This setting is available only when  
"FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE" is set to "Y".  
Changing this setting may require restarting the unit.  
Value Range  
Y(Enable automatic firmware update)  
N(Disable automatic firmware update)  
Y
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
142  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
           
4.3.5 Provisioning Settings  
FIRM_FILE_PATH  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the URL where the firmware file is stored.  
Note  
This setting is available only when  
"FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE" is set to "Y".  
Changing this setting may require restarting the unit.  
Value Range  
Max. 255 characters  
Note  
The format must be RFC 1738 compliant, as follows:  
"<schema>://<user>:<password>@<host>:<port>/<url-path>".  
"<user>" must be less than 64 characters.  
"<password>" must be less than 64 characters.  
"<user>:<password>@" may be empty.  
The total of "<schema>://" and "<host>:<port>/<url-path>"  
must be less than 128 characters.  
":<port>" can be omitted if you do not need to specify the  
port number.  
If "{mac}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the  
unit’s MAC address in lower-case.  
If "{MAC}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the  
unit’s MAC address in upper-case.  
If "{MODEL}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the  
unit’s model name.  
If "{fwver}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with either  
"FIRM_VER_EUDECT" or "FIRM_VER_USDECT" depending on  
the system. Note that this rule differs from other parameters  
such as "SIP_USER_AGENT".  
Default Value  
Empty string  
Web User Interface Reference  
4.3.5 Provisioning Settings  
OPTION66_ENABLE  
Value Format  
Description  
Boolean  
Specifies whether to enable the unit to look for option 66 to receive the  
TFTP server address or FQDN from the DHCP server.  
Note  
The unit will try to download configuration files through the  
TFTP server, the IP address or FQDN of which is specified in  
the option number 66 field.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
143  
               
4.3.5 Provisioning Settings  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Y(Enable option 66)  
N(Disable option 66)  
Y
PROVISION_ENABLE  
Value Format  
Description  
Boolean  
Specifies whether the unit is automatically configured by downloading  
the configuration files from the provisioning server of your phone  
system.  
Value Range  
Y(Enable configuration file download)  
N(Disable configuration file download)  
Y
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the URL of the standard configuration file, which is used when  
every unit needs different settings.  
Note  
When you change this setting, set "PROVISION_ENABLE" to  
"Y" at the same time.  
144  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
         
4.3.5 Provisioning Settings  
Value Range  
Max. 255 characters  
Note  
The format must be RFC 1738 compliant, as follows:  
"<schema>://<user>:<password>@<host>:<port>/<url-path>"  
"<user>" must be less than 64 characters.  
"<password>" must be less than 64 characters.  
"<user>:<password>@" may be empty.  
The total of "<schema>://" and "<host>:<port>/<url-path>"  
must be less than 128 characters.  
":<port>" can be omitted if you do not need to specify the  
port number.  
If "{mac}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the  
unit’s MAC address in lower-case.  
If "{MAC}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the  
unit’s MAC address in upper-case.  
If "{MODEL}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the  
unit’s model name.  
If "{fwver}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the  
unit’s firmware version.  
If this URL ends with "/" (slash), "Config{mac}.cfg" is  
automatically added at the end of the URL.  
For example, CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH="http://  
host/dir/"becomes  
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH="http://host/dir/  
Config{mac}.cfg".  
Default Value  
Empty string  
Note  
The URL specified by your phone system dealer may be preset  
in the unit.  
Web User Interface Reference  
CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the URL of the product configuration file, which is used when  
all units with the same model number need the same settings.  
Note  
When you change this setting, set "PROVISION_ENABLE" to  
"Y" at the same time.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
145  
     
4.3.5 Provisioning Settings  
Value Range  
Max. 255 characters  
Note  
The format must be RFC 1738 compliant, as follows:  
"<schema>://<user>:<password>@<host>:<port>/<url-path>"  
"<user>" must be less than 64 characters.  
"<password>" must be less than 64 characters.  
"<user>:<password>@" may be empty.  
The total of "<schema>://" and "<host>:<port>/<url-path>"  
must be less than 128 characters.  
":<port>" can be omitted if you do not need to specify the  
port number.  
If "{mac}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the  
unit’s MAC address in lower-case.  
If "{MAC}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the  
unit’s MAC address in upper-case.  
If "{MODEL}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the  
unit’s model name.  
If "{fwver}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the  
unit’s firmware version.  
If this URL ends with "/" (slash), "{MODEL}.cfg" is automatically  
added at the end of the URL.  
For example, CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH="http://host/  
dir/"becomes CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH="http://  
host/dir/{MODEL}.cfg".  
Default Value  
Empty string  
Note  
The URL specified by your phone system dealer may be preset  
in the unit.  
Web User Interface Reference  
CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the URL of the master configuration file, which is used when  
all units need the same settings.  
Note  
When you change this setting, set "PROVISION_ENABLE" to  
"Y" at the same time.  
146  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
     
4.3.5 Provisioning Settings  
Value Range  
Max. 255 characters  
Note  
The format must be RFC 1738 compliant, as follows:  
"<schema>://<user>:<password>@<host>:<port>/<url-path>"  
"<user>" must be less than 64 characters.  
"<password>" must be less than 64 characters.  
"<user>:<password>@" may be empty.  
The total of "<schema>://" and "<host>:<port>/<url-path>"  
must be less than 128 characters.  
":<port>" can be omitted if you do not need to specify the  
port number.  
If "{mac}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the  
unit’s MAC address in lower-case.  
If "{MAC}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the  
unit’s MAC address in upper-case.  
If "{MODEL}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the  
unit’s model name.  
If "{fwver}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the  
unit’s firmware version.  
If this URL ends with "/" (slash), "sip.cfg" is automatically added  
at the end of the URL.  
For example, CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH="http://host/  
dir/"becomes CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH="http://  
host/dir/sip.cfg".  
Default Value  
Empty string  
Note  
The URL specified by your phone system dealer may be preset  
in the unit.  
Web User Interface Reference  
CFG_FILE_KEY1  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the encryption key (password) used to decrypt configuration  
files.  
Note  
If the extension of the configuration file is ".e1c", the  
configuration file will be decrypted using this key.  
Value Range  
32-byte characters  
Note  
If an empty string is set for this parameter, decryption with this  
value is disabled.  
Default Value  
A unique value is preset to each unit.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
147  
     
4.3.5 Provisioning Settings  
CFG_FILE_KEY2  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the encryption key (password) used to decrypt configuration  
files.  
Note  
If the extension of the configuration file is ".e2c", the  
configuration file will be decrypted using this key.  
Value Range  
32-byte characters  
Note  
If an empty string is set for this parameter, decryption with this  
value is disabled.  
Default Value  
Empty string  
CFG_FILE_KEY3  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the encryption key (password) used to decrypt configuration  
files.  
Note  
If the extension of the configuration file is ".e3c", the  
configuration file will be decrypted using this key.  
Value Range  
32-byte characters  
Note  
If an empty string is set for this parameter, decryption with this  
value is disabled.  
Default Value  
Empty string  
CFG_FILE_KEY_LENGTH  
Value Format  
Description  
Value Range  
Integer  
Specifies the key lengths in bits used to decrypt configuration files.  
128  
192  
256  
Default Value  
128  
CFG_CYCLIC  
Value Format  
Boolean  
148  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
                 
4.3.5 Provisioning Settings  
Description  
Value Range  
Specifies whether the unit periodically checks for updates of  
configuration files.  
Y(Enable periodic synchronization of configuration files)  
N(Disable periodic synchronization of configuration files)  
N
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the interval, in minutes, between periodic checks for updates  
of the configuration files.  
Value Range  
1–40320  
Default Value  
10080  
Web User Interface Reference  
CFG_RTRY_INTVL  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the period of time, in minutes, that the unit will retry checking  
for an update of the configuration files after a configuration file access  
error has occurred.  
Note  
1–1440  
30  
This setting is available only when "CFG_CYCLIC" is set to "Y".  
Value Range  
Default Value  
CFG_RESYNC_TIME  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the time (hour:minute) that the unit checks for updates of  
configuration files.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
149  
           
4.4.1 IP Settings  
Value Range  
00:00–23:59  
Note  
If the value for this setting is any valid value other than an empty  
string, the unit downloads the configuration files at the fixed  
time, and the settings specified in "CFG_CYCLIC",  
"CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL", and "CFG_RTRY_INTVL" are  
disabled.  
If the value for this setting is an empty string, downloading the  
configuration files at the fixed time are disabled.  
Default Value  
Empty string  
CFG_RESYNC_FROM_SIP  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the value of the "Event" header sent from the SIP server to  
the unit so that the unit can access the configuration files on the  
provisioning server.  
Value Range  
Max. 15 characters  
Note  
If the value for this setting is any value other than an empty  
string (typically "check-sync" or "resync" is set), the unit will  
access the configuration files on the provisioning server when  
the SIP server sends an event to notify the unit.  
If the value for this setting is an empty string, the unit will not  
access the configuration files on the provisioning server even if  
the unit receives a synchronization notification of an event.  
Default Value  
check-sync  
Web User Interface Reference  
4.4 Network Settings  
4.4.1 IP Settings  
CONNECTION_TYPE  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies whether to assign the IP address automatically (DHCP) or  
manually (static).  
Note  
This setting is available only when "NW_SETTING_ENABLE" is  
set to "N".  
150  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
               
4.4.1 IP Settings  
Value Range  
Default Value  
1 (DHCP)  
0 (Static)  
1
Phone User Interface  
Reference  
Web User Interface Reference  
HOST_NAME  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the host name for the unit to send to the DHCP server.  
Note  
This setting is available only when "CONNECTION_TYPE" is set  
to "1".  
Value Range  
Max. 63 characters  
Note  
An empty string is not allowed.  
Default Value  
Model number (example: TGP5nn)  
Web User Interface Reference  
DHCP_DNS_ENABLE  
Value Format  
Description  
Boolean  
Specifies whether to receive DNS server addresses automatically or to  
assign a DNS server addresses (up to 2) manually.  
Note  
This setting is available only when "CONNECTION_TYPE" is set  
to "1" and when "NW_SETTING_ENABLE" is set to "N".  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Y(Use "USER_DNS1_ADDR" or, "USER_DNS1_ADDR" and  
"USER_DNS2_ADDR")  
N(Receive DNS server address automatically)  
N
Phone User Interface  
Reference  
Web User Interface Reference  
STATIC_IP_ADDRESS  
Value Format  
String  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
151  
             
4.4.1 IP Settings  
Description  
Specifies the IP address for the unit.  
Note  
This setting is available only when "CONNECTION_TYPE" is set  
to "0" and when "NW_SETTING_ENABLE" is set to "N".  
When you specify this parameter, you must specify  
"STATIC_SUBNET" together in a configuration file.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
IP address in dotted-decimal notation  
Empty string  
Phone User Interface  
Reference  
Web User Interface Reference  
STATIC_SUBNET  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the subnet mask for the unit.  
Note  
This setting is available only when "CONNECTION_TYPE" is set  
to "0" and when "NW_SETTING_ENABLE" is set to "N".  
When you specify this parameter, you must specify  
"STATIC_IP_ADDRESS" together in a configuration file.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
IP address in dotted-decimal notation  
Empty string  
Phone User Interface  
Reference  
Web User Interface Reference  
STATIC_GATEWAY  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the IP address of the default gateway for the network where  
the unit is connected.  
Note  
This setting is available only when "CONNECTION_TYPE" is set  
to "0" and when "NW_SETTING_ENABLE" is set to "N".  
When you specify this parameter, you must specify  
"STATIC_IP_ADDRESS" and "STATIC_SUBNET" together in a  
configuration file.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
IP address in dotted-decimal notation  
Empty string  
152  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
       
4.4.2 DNS Settings  
Phone User Interface  
Reference  
Web User Interface Reference  
USER_DNS1_ADDR  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.  
Note  
This setting is available only when "CONNECTION_TYPE" is set  
to "0" and when "NW_SETTING_ENABLE" is set to "N".  
Value Range  
Default Value  
IP address in dotted-decimal notation  
Empty string  
Phone User Interface  
Reference  
Web User Interface Reference  
USER_DNS2_ADDR  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.  
Note  
This setting is available only when "CONNECTION_TYPE" is set  
to "0" and when "NW_SETTING_ENABLE" is set to "N".  
Value Range  
Default Value  
IP address in dotted-decimal notation  
Empty string  
Phone User Interface  
Reference  
Web User Interface Reference  
4.4.2 DNS Settings  
DNS_QRY_PRLL  
Value Format  
Description  
Boolean  
Specifies the DNS query method as parallel or sequential.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
153  
                   
4.4.2 DNS Settings  
Value Range  
Y(Parallel)  
N(Sequential)  
Note  
If set to "Y", the unit sends out all DNS queries at the same time.  
The first DNS reply will be accepted and used by the unit.  
If set to "N", the unit sends DNS queries sequentially.  
The unit sends a request to the DNS server with the highest  
priority for a preprogrammed time period (5 seconds). When the  
timer expires, the unit sends a request to the DNS server with  
the second priority.  
Y
Default Value  
DNS_PRIORITY  
Value Format  
Description  
Value Range  
Boolean  
Specifies the priority of the DNS server.  
Y("DNS1_ADDR" and "DNS2_ADDR" have first priority.)  
N("DNS1_ADDR" and "DNS2_ADDR" have no priority.)  
Note  
If set to "Y", the DNS servers specified in "DNS1_ADDR" and  
"DNS2_ADDR" will be queried first. If the queries fail, the DNS  
server specified by the user (DHCP or static) will be queried.  
If set to "N", the DNS server specified by the user (DHCP or  
static) will be queried first. If the query fails, the DNS servers  
specified in "DNS1_ADDR" and "DNS2_ADDR" will be queried.  
N
Default Value  
DNS1_ADDR  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server for your phone  
system dealer.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
IP address in dotted-decimal notation  
Empty string  
DNS2_ADDR  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server for your phone  
system dealer.  
Value Range  
IP address in dotted-decimal notation  
154  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
               
4.4.3 Ethernet Port Settings  
Default Value  
Empty string  
4.4.3 Ethernet Port Settings  
VLAN_ENABLE (KX-TGP550 only)  
Value Format  
Description  
Boolean  
Specifies whether to use the VLAN feature to perform VoIP  
communication securely.  
Note  
This setting is available only when "NW_SETTING_ENABLE" is  
set to "N".  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Y(Enable)  
N(Disable)  
N
Phone User Interface  
Reference  
Web User Interface Reference  
VLAN_ID_IP_PHONE (KX-TGP550 only)  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the VLAN ID for this unit.  
Note  
This setting is available only when "NW_SETTING_ENABLE" is  
set to "N".  
Value Range  
Default Value  
1–4094  
2
Phone User Interface  
Reference  
Web User Interface Reference  
VLAN_PRI_IP_PHONE (KX-TGP550 only)  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the priority number for the unit.  
Note  
This setting is available only when "NW_SETTING_ENABLE" is  
set to "N".  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
155  
               
4.4.4 HTTP Settings  
Value Range  
Default Value  
0–7  
7
Phone User Interface  
Reference  
Web User Interface Reference  
VLAN_ID_PC (KX-TGP550 only)  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the VLAN ID for the PC.  
Note  
This setting is available only when "NW_SETTING_ENABLE" is  
set to "N".  
Value Range  
Default Value  
1–4094  
1
Phone User Interface  
Reference  
Web User Interface Reference  
VLAN_PRI_PC (KX-TGP550 only)  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the priority number for the PC.  
Note  
This setting is available only when "NW_SETTING_ENABLE" is  
set to "N".  
Value Range  
Default Value  
0–7  
7
Phone User Interface  
Reference  
Web User Interface Reference  
4.4.4 HTTP Settings  
HTTP_VER  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies which version of the HTTP protocol to use for HTTP  
communication.  
156  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
               
4.4.4 HTTP Settings  
Value Range  
1 (Use HTTP 1.0)  
0 (Use HTTP 1.1)  
Note  
For this unit, it is strongly recommended that you specify "1" for  
this setting. However, if the HTTP server does not function well  
with HTTP 1.0, try changing the setting "0".  
Default Value  
1
Web User Interface Reference  
HTTP_USER_AGENT  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the text string to send as the user agent in the header of HTTP  
requests.  
Value Range  
Max. 40 characters  
Note  
An empty string is not allowed.  
If "{mac}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with  
the unit’s MAC address in lower-case.  
If "{MAC}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with  
the unit’s MAC address in upper-case.  
If "{MODEL}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced  
with the unit’s model name.  
If "{fwver}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with  
the firmware version of the unit.  
Default Value  
Panasonic_{MODEL}/{fwver} ({mac})  
Web User Interface Reference  
HTTP_SSL_VERIFY  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies whether to enable the verification of the root certificate.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
157  
         
4.4.5 Time Adjust Settings  
Value Range  
0 (No verification of root certificate)  
1 (Simple verification of root certificate)  
2 (Precise verification of root certificate)  
Note  
If set to "0", the verification of the root certificate is disabled.  
If set to "1", the verification of the root certificate is enabled. In  
this case, the validity of the certificate’s date, certificate’s chain,  
and the confirmation of the root certificate will be verified.  
If set to "2", precise certificate verification is enabled. In this  
case, the validity of the server name will be verified in addition  
to the items verified when "1" is set.  
Default Value  
0
CFG_ROOT_CERTIFICATE_PATH  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the URI of the root certificate.  
Note  
Changing this setting may require restarting the unit.  
Value Range  
Max. 255 characters  
Note  
The format must be RFC 1738 compliant, as follows:  
"<schema>://<user>:<password>@<host>:<port>/<url-path>"  
"<user>" must be less than 64 characters.  
"<password>" must be less than 64 characters.  
"<user>:<password>@" may be empty.  
The total of "<schema>://" and "<host>:<port>/<url-path>"  
must be less than 128 characters.  
":<port>" can be omitted if you do not need to specify the  
port number.  
Default Value  
Empty string  
4.4.5 Time Adjust Settings  
NTP_ADDR  
Value Format  
String  
Description  
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the NTP server.  
Max. 127 characters (IP address in dotted-decimal notation or FQDN)  
Empty string  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
158  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
             
4.4.6 STUN Settings  
TIME_SYNC_INTVL  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the interval, in seconds, to resynchronize after having  
detected no reply from the NTP server.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
10–86400  
60  
TIME_QUERY_INTVL  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between synchronizations with the  
NTP server.  
Value Range  
10–86400  
Default Value  
43200  
Web User Interface Reference  
4.4.6 STUN Settings  
STUN_SERV_ADDR  
Value Format  
String  
Description  
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the STUN server.  
Max. 127 characters (IP address in dotted-decimal notation or FQDN)  
Empty string  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
STUN_SERV_PORT  
Value Format  
Integer  
Description  
Specifies the port number of the STUN server.  
Value Range  
1–65535  
Default Value  
3478  
Web User Interface Reference  
STUN_2NDSERV_ADDR  
Value Format  
String  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
159  
                       
4.4.7 Miscellaneous Network Settings  
Description  
Specifies the IP address of the secondary STUN server.  
Note  
This setting is available only when "STUN_SERV_ADDR" is  
specified in IP address notation.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
IP address in dotted-decimal notation  
Empty string  
STUN_2NDSERV_PORT  
Value Format  
Description  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Integer  
Specifies the port number of the secondary STUN server.  
1–65535  
3478  
4.4.7 Miscellaneous Network Settings  
NW_SETTING_ENABLE  
Value Format  
Description  
Boolean  
Specifies whether to enable the network settings from the base unit and  
handsets.  
Note  
If you change this setting to "N" when the network settings (with  
the exception of "HOST_NAME") in 4.4.1 IP Settings have been  
made through Web user interface programming, clear these  
settings once by performing Reset Web Settings from the Web  
user interface, and then change this setting to "N".  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Y(Enable network settings)  
N(Disable network settings)  
Y
CUSTOM_WEB_PAGE  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies whether to enable the settings in 3.4.1 Basic Network  
Settings and 3.5.5 Time Adjust Settings from the Web user interface  
when logged in with the User account.  
160  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
               
4.5.1 Call Control Settings  
Value Range  
Default Value  
0–3  
0: Enable "Basic Network Settings" and "Time Adjust Settings"  
1: Disable "Basic Network Settings"  
2: Disable "Time Adjust Settings"  
3: Disable "Basic Network Settings" and "Time Adjust Settings"  
0
4.5 Telephone Settings  
4.5.1 Call Control Settings  
CONFERENCE_SERVER_ADDRESS  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the URI for a conference server, which consists of a user part,  
the "@" symbol, and a host part, for example,  
Note  
Availability depends on your phone system.  
Value Range  
Max. 127 characters  
Default Value  
Empty string  
Web User Interface Reference  
EMERGENCY_CALL[1–5]  
Parameter Name Example  
EMERGENCY_CALL1, EMERGENCY_CALL2, EMERGENCY_CALL3,  
EMERGENCY_CALL4, EMERGENCY_CALL5  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the phone numbers used for making emergency calls. A user  
can dial any of the specified phone numbers at any time regardless of  
any restrictions imposed on the unit. A maximum of 5 phone numbers  
can be specified.  
Note  
When a phone number is specified here, it will be prioritized  
over the setting specified in "DIAL_PLAN_[1–8]" in 4.7.1 Call  
Value Range  
Max. 24 characters  
Empty string  
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
161  
               
4.5.2 Tone Settings  
FIRSTDIGIT_TIM  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, within which the first digits of  
a dial number must be dialed. When this timer expires, the unit will play  
a busy tone.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
10–600  
30  
INTDIGIT_TIM  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, within which subsequent digits  
of a dial number must be dialed. When this timer expires after the last  
key was pressed, dialing will start.  
Value Range  
3–10  
Default Value  
5
Web User Interface Reference  
VM_SUBSCRIBE_ENABLE  
Value Format  
Description  
Boolean  
Specifies whether to send the SUBSCRIBE request to a voice mail  
server.  
Note  
Your phone system must support voice mail.  
Value Range  
Y(Send the SUBSCRIBE request)  
N(Do not send the SUBSCRIBE request)  
N
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
4.5.2 Tone Settings  
DIAL_TONE_FRQ  
Value Format  
Description  
Comma-separated Integer  
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of dial tones using 2 whole  
numbers separated by a comma.  
162  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
                   
4.5.2 Tone Settings  
Value Range  
0, 200–1000 (0: No tone)  
Note  
If the value for this setting is "350,440", the unit will use a mixed  
signal of a 350 Hz tone and a 440 Hz tone.  
Default Value  
350,440  
Web User Interface Reference  
DIAL_TONE_TIMING  
Value Format  
Description  
Comma-separated Integer  
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of dial tones using 4 whole  
numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2) separated by commas.  
Value Range  
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)  
Note  
The unit will play the tone for the duration of the first value, stop  
it for the duration of the second value, play it for the duration of  
the third value, and then stop it for the duration of the last value.  
The whole sequence will then repeat. For example, if the value  
for this setting is "100,100,0,0", the unit will play the tone for 100  
ms, stop it for 100 ms, and then play it continuously.  
Default Value  
0,0,0,0 (The unit plays the dial tone continuously.)  
Web User Interface Reference  
BUSY_TONE_FRQ  
Value Format  
Description  
Comma-separated Integer  
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of busy tones using 2  
whole numbers separated by a comma.  
Value Range  
0, 200–1000 (0: No tone)  
480,620  
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
BUSY_TONE_TIMING  
Value Format  
Description  
Comma-separated Integer  
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of busy tones using 4 whole  
numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2) separated by commas.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)  
500,500,500,500  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
163  
           
4.5.2 Tone Settings  
Web User Interface Reference  
Comma-separated Integer  
RINGING_TONE_FRQ  
Value Format  
Description  
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of ringback tones using 2  
whole numbers separated by a comma.  
Value Range  
0, 200–1000 (0: No tone)  
440,480  
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
RINGING_TONE_TIMING  
Value Format  
Description  
Comma-separated Integer  
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of ringback tones using 4 whole  
numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2) separated by commas.  
Value Range  
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)  
2000,4000,2000,4000  
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
STT_TONE_FRQ  
Value Format  
Description  
Comma-separated Integer  
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of stutter dial tones to  
notify that a voice mail is waiting, using 2 whole numbers separated by  
a comma.  
Value Range  
0, 200–1000 (0: No tone)  
350,440  
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
STT_TONE_TIMING  
Value Format  
Description  
Comma-separated Integer  
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of stutter dial tones to notify that  
a voice mail is waiting, using 22 whole numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2,  
…, on 11, off 11) separated by commas.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)  
100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,  
100,100,100,100,100,100,100,0,0  
164  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
               
4.5.2 Tone Settings  
Web User Interface Reference  
Comma-separated Integer  
REORDER_TONE_FRQ  
Value Format  
Description  
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of reorder tones using 2  
whole numbers separated by a comma.  
Value Range  
0, 200–1000 (0: No tone)  
480,620  
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
REORDER_TONE_TIMING  
Value Format  
Description  
Comma-separated Integer  
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of reorder tones using 8 whole  
numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2, on 3, off 3, on 4, off 4) separated by  
commas.  
Value Range  
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)  
Default Value  
250,250,250,250,250,250,250,250  
Web User Interface Reference  
HOWLER_TONE_FRQ  
Value Format  
Description  
Comma-separated Integer  
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of howler tones (i.e., alarm  
tones) using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma.  
Value Range  
0, 200–3000 (0: No tone)  
1400,2060  
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
HOWLER_TONE_TIMING  
Value Format  
Description  
Comma-separated Integer  
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of howler tones (i.e., alarm tones)  
using 4 whole numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2) separated by commas.  
Value Range  
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)  
100,100,100,100  
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
165  
               
4.5.2 Tone Settings  
HOWLER_START_TIME  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that busy or reorder tones play  
until they switch to howler tones.  
Value Range  
0–120 (0: Disable)  
30  
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
BELL_CORE_PATTERN1_TIMING  
Value Format  
Description  
Comma-separated Integer  
Specifies the cadence, in milliseconds, of pattern ID 1, described in the  
LSSGR, GR-506-CORE, "Signaling for Analog Interfaces" section 14,  
using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)  
2000,4000  
BELL_CORE_PATTERN2_TIMING  
Value Format  
Description  
Comma-separated Integer  
Specifies the cadence, in milliseconds, of pattern ID 2, described in the  
LSSGR, GR-506-CORE, "Signaling for Analog Interfaces" section 14,  
using 4 whole numbers separated by commas.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)  
800,400,800,4000  
BELL_CORE_PATTERN3_TIMING  
Value Format  
Description  
Comma-separated Integer  
Specifies the cadence, in milliseconds, of pattern ID 3, described in the  
LSSGR, GR-506-CORE, "Signaling for Analog Interfaces" section 14,  
using 6 whole numbers separated by commas.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)  
400,200,400,200,800,4000  
BELL_CORE_PATTERN4_TIMING  
Value Format  
Comma-separated Integer  
166  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
                   
4.6.1 Codec Settings  
Description  
Specifies the cadence, in milliseconds, of pattern ID 4, described in the  
LSSGR, GR-506-CORE, "Signaling for Analog Interfaces" section 14,  
using 6 whole numbers separated by commas.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)  
300,200,1000,200,300,4000  
BELL_CORE_PATTERN5_TIMING  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the cadence, in milliseconds, of pattern ID 5, described in the  
LSSGR, GR-506-CORE, "Signaling for Analog Interfaces" section 14.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)  
500  
4.6 VoIP Settings  
4.6.1 Codec Settings  
SDP_CODEC[0–4]_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SDP_CODEC0_1, SDP_CODEC0_2, …, SDP_CODEC0_8,  
SDP_CODEC1_1, SDP_CODEC1_2, …, SDP_CODEC1_8, …,  
SDP_CODEC4_1, SDP_CODEC4_2, …, SDP_CODEC4_8  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the 1st to 5th priority (from 0–4) codec to be used for each  
line (from 1–8) with "SDP_CODECx_y" (x: priority, y: line number).  
Value Range  
Max. 32 characters  
G722  
PCMA (G.711 A-law)  
G726-32 (G.726 [32k])  
G729A  
PCMU (G.711 µ-law)  
Empty string  
Default Value  
G722 (for SDP_CODEC0_1to SDP_CODEC0_8)  
PCMA (for SDP_CODEC1_1to SDP_CODEC1_8)  
G726-32 (for SDP_CODEC2_1to SDP_CODEC2_8)  
G729A (for SDP_CODEC3_1to SDP_CODEC3_8)  
PCMU (for SDP_CODEC4_1to SDP_CODEC4_8)  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
167  
               
4.6.1 Codec Settings  
Web User Interface Reference  
SDP_CKRTE[0–4]_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SDP_CKRTE0_1, SDP_CKRTE0_2, …, SDP_CKRTE0_8,  
SDP_CKRTE1_1, SDP_CKRTE1_2, …, SDP_CKRTE1_8, …,  
SDP_CKRTE4_1, SDP_CKRTE4_2, …, SDP_CKRTE4_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the sampling rate with "SDP_CKRTEx_y" for the  
corresponding encoding name specified by "SDP_CODECx_y" (x:  
priority, y: line number).  
Value Range  
Default Value  
0, 8000, or 16000 (0: Unused SDP, 8000 or 16000: Available SDPs)  
Note  
The value "16000" is valid only for the G722 codec.  
8000  
SDP_PARAM[0–4]_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SDP_PARAM0_1, SDP_PARAM0_2, …, SDP_PARAM0_8,  
SDP_PARAM1_1, SDP_PARAM1_2, …, SDP_PARAM1_8, …,  
SDP_PARAM4_1, SDP_PARAM4_2, …, SDP_PARAM4_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the number of audio channels with "SDP_PARAMx_y" for the  
corresponding encoding name specified by "SDP_CODECx_y" (x:  
priority, y: line number).  
Note  
For the current version, only the value "0" is supported.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
0, 1–255 (0: No parameter specification, 1–255: Audio channels)  
0
SDP_PTYPE[0–4]_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SDP_PTYPE0_1, SDP_PTYPE0_2, …, SDP_PTYPE0_8,  
SDP_PTYPE1_1, SDP_PTYPE1_2, …, SDP_PTYPE1_8, …,  
SDP_PTYPE4_1, SDP_PTYPE4_2, …, SDP_PTYPE4_8  
Value Format  
Integer  
168  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
           
4.6.1 Codec Settings  
Description  
Value Range  
Specifies the payload type number with "SDP_PTYPEx_y" for the  
corresponding encoding name specified by "SDP_CODECx_y" (x:  
priority, y: line number).  
0–127, 255  
Note  
If an empty string is set for "SDP_CODECx_y", "255" must be  
set as the value for the corresponding "SDP_PTYPEx_y".  
Default Value  
9 (for SDP_PTYPE0_1to SDP_PTYPE0_8)  
8 (for SDP_PTYPE1_1to SDP_PTYPE1_8)  
2 (for SDP_PTYPE2_1to SDP_PTYPE2_8)  
18 (for SDP_PTYPE3_1to SDP_PTYPE3_8)  
0 (for SDP_PTYPE4_1to SDP_PTYPE4_8)  
CODEC_G711_REQ  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies whether to set "PCMU" as a codec selection automatically  
when "SDP_CODECx_y" (x: priority, y: line number) is set to any codec  
selection other than "PCMU".  
Note  
Changing this setting may require restarting the unit.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
0 (Do not set "PCMU")  
1 (Set "PCMU")  
1
CODEC_G729_PARAM  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies whether to add an attribute line, "a=fmtp:18 annexb=no", to  
SDP when "SDP_CODECx_y" (x: priority, y: line number) is set to  
"G729A".  
Note  
Changing this setting may require restarting the unit.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
0 (Do not add "a=fmtp:18 annexb=no")  
1 (Add "a=fmtp:18 annexb=no")  
0
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
169  
       
4.6.2 RTP Settings  
4.6.2 RTP Settings  
TOS_RTP_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
Value Format  
TOS_RTP_1, TOS_RTP_2, …, TOS_RTP_8  
Integer  
Description  
Specifies the value to be stored in the ToS (Type of Service) field in the  
IP header of RTP packets as a DSCP for DiffServ.  
Note  
The structures of the ToS/DS field in an IP header are shown  
below.  
ToS field  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Currently  
unused  
1bit  
Precedence  
3bits  
Type of Service  
4bits  
DS field  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Currently  
unused  
2bits  
DSCP  
6bits  
The ToS field consists of a 3-bit precedence, a 4-bit type of  
service, and a 1-bit unused field.  
The DS filed consists of a 6-bit DSCP and a 2-bit unused field.  
170  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
       
4.6.2 RTP Settings  
Value Range  
0–255  
Note  
Because the 6-bit DSCP values (i.e., "xxx 000" where "x"="0"  
or "1") in the DS field are converted to the 8-bit DSCP values  
(i.e., "xxx 000 00"), you must specify here the fourfold decimal  
value for 2 bits shifted left. The following listing shows the DSCP  
level of DiffServ and the corresponding decimal value to be  
specified in this parameter.  
Best Effort (default) (000 000 00): 0  
AF11 (DSCP 10) (001 010 00): 40  
AF12 (DSCP 12) (001 100 00): 48  
AF13 (DSCP 14) (001 110 00): 56  
AF21 (DSCP 18) (010 010 00): 72  
AF22 (DSCP 20) (010 100 00): 80  
AF23 (DSCP 22) (010 110 00): 88  
AF31 (DSCP 26) (011 010 00): 104  
AF32 (DSCP 28) (011 100 00): 112  
AF33 (DSCP 30) (011 110 00): 120  
AF41 (DSCP 34) (100 010 00): 136  
AF42 (DSCP 36) (100 100 00): 144  
AF43 (DSCP 38) (100 110 00): 152  
CS1 (ToS 1) (001 000 00): 32  
CS2 (ToS 2) (010 000 00): 64  
CS3 (ToS 3) (011 000 00): 96  
CS4 (ToS 4) (100 000 00): 128  
CS5 (ToS 5) (101 000 00): 160  
CS6 (ToS 6) (110 000 00): 192  
CS7 (ToS 7) (111 000 00): 224  
EF (Expedited Forwarding) (DSCP 46) (101 110 00): 184  
Default Value  
0
Web User Interface Reference  
RTCP_INTVL_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
Value Format  
RTCP_INTVL_1, RTCP_INTVL_2, …, RTCP_INTVL_8  
Integer  
Description  
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between RTCP packets.  
Value Range  
0, 5–65535 (0: Disable)  
Default Value  
0
Web User Interface Reference  
MAX_DELAY_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
MAX_DELAY_1, MAX_DELAY_2, …, MAX_DELAY_8  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
171  
       
4.6.2 RTP Settings  
Value Format  
Description  
Value Range  
Integer  
Specifies the maximum delay, in 10-millisecond units, of the jitter buffer.  
3–50 (´ 10 ms)  
Note  
This setting is subject to the following conditions:  
This value must be greater than "NOM_DELAY"  
This value must be greater than "MIN_DELAY"  
"NOM_DELAY" must be greater than or equal to  
"MIN_DELAY"  
Default Value  
20  
Web User Interface Reference  
MIN_DELAY_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
Value Format  
MIN_DELAY_1, MIN_DELAY_2, …, MIN_DELAY_8  
Integer  
Description  
Specifies the minimum delay, in 10-millisecond units, of the jitter buffer.  
Value Range  
1 or 2 (´ 10 ms)  
Note  
This setting is subject to the following conditions:  
This value must be less than or equal to "NOM_DELAY"  
This value must be less than "MAX_DELAY"  
"MAX_DELAY" must be greater than "NOM_DELAY"  
Default Value  
2
Web User Interface Reference  
NOM_DELAY_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
Value Format  
NOM_DELAY_1, NOM_DELAY_2, …, NOM_DELAY_8  
Integer  
Description  
Specifies the initial delay, in 10-millisecond units, of the jitter buffer.  
Value Range  
1–7 (´ 10 ms)  
Note  
This setting is subject to the following conditions:  
This value must be greater than or equal to "MIN_DELAY"  
This value must be less than "MAX_DELAY"  
Default Value  
2
Web User Interface Reference  
172  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
       
4.6.2 RTP Settings  
RTP_PORT_MIN  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the lowest port number that the unit will use for RTP packets.  
Note  
If port numbers are specified in [Channel 1–3] in  
3.4.5.3 External RTP Port in the Web user interface, this  
setting is ignored and the corresponding external RTP port is  
enabled.  
Value Range  
1024–48750 (even number only)  
Note  
The value for this setting must be less than or equal to  
"RTP_PORT_MAX" - 400.  
Default Value  
16000  
Web User Interface Reference  
RTP_PORT_MAX  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the highest port number that the unit will use for RTP packets.  
Note  
If port numbers are specified in [Channel 1–3] in  
3.4.5.3 External RTP Port in the Web user interface, this  
setting is ignored and the corresponding external RTP port is  
enabled.  
Value Range  
1424–49150 (even number only)  
Note  
The value for this setting must be greater than or equal to  
"RTP_PORT_MIN" + 400.  
Default Value  
20000  
Web User Interface Reference  
RTP_PTIME  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the interval, in milliseconds, between transmissions of RTP  
packets.  
Value Range  
20  
30  
40  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
173  
           
4.6.3 Miscellaneous VoIP Settings  
Default Value  
20  
Web User Interface Reference  
4.6.3 Miscellaneous VoIP Settings  
OUTBANDDTMF_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
Value Format  
OUTBANDDTMF_1, OUTBANDDTMF_2, …, OUTBANDDTMF_8  
Boolean  
Description  
Specifies the method for transmitting DTMF tones.  
Value Range  
Y(Outband [use telephone-event])  
N(Inband)  
Note  
If set to "Y", DTMF tones will be sent through SDP, compliant  
with RFC 2833.  
If set to "N", DTMF tones will be encoded in the RTP stream.  
Y
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
TELEVENT_PTYPE_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
TELEVENT_PTYPE_1, TELEVENT_PTYPE_2, …,  
TELEVENT_PTYPE_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the RFC 2833 payload type for DTMF tones.  
Note  
This setting is available only when "OUTBANDDTMF_[1–8]" is  
set to "Y".  
Value Range  
96–127  
101  
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_1, RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_2, …,  
RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Boolean  
Specifies whether to enable the RFC 2543 Call Hold feature on this line.  
174  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
                 
4.7.1 Call Control Settings  
Value Range  
Y(Enable RFC 2543 Call Hold)  
N(Disable RFC 2543 Call Hold)  
Note  
If set to "Y", the "c=0.0.0.0" syntax will be set in SDP when  
sending a re-INVITE message to hold the call.  
If set to "N", the "c=x.x.x.x" syntax will be set in SDP.  
Y
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
4.7 Line Settings  
4.7.1 Call Control Settings  
VM_NUMBER_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
Value Format  
VM_NUMBER_1, VM_NUMBER_2, …, VM_NUMBER_8  
String  
Description  
Specifies the phone number used to access the voice mail server.  
Note  
Your phone system must support voice mail.  
Value Range  
Max. 24 characters (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)  
Note  
No other characters are allowed.  
Default Value  
Empty string  
Web User Interface Reference  
DIAL_PLAN_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
Value Format  
DIAL_PLAN_1, DIAL_PLAN_2, …, DIAL_PLAN_8  
String  
Description  
Specifies a dial format, such as specific phone numbers, that control  
which numbers can be dialed or how to handle the call when making a  
call. For details, see 5.3 Dial Plan.  
Value Range  
Max. 500 characters  
Empty string  
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
175  
               
4.7.1 Call Control Settings  
DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_1,  
DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_2, …,  
DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Boolean  
Specifies whether to enable dial plan filtering so that a call is not made  
when the dialed number does not match any of the dial formats  
specified in "DIAL_PLAN_[1–8]".  
Value Range  
Y(Enable dial plan filtering)  
N(Disable dial plan filtering)  
Note  
If set to "Y", the dialed number will not be sent to the line when  
the number dialed by the user does not match any of the dial  
formats specified in the dial plan.  
If set to "N", the dialed number will be sent to the line, even if  
the number dialed by the user does not match any of the dial  
formats specified in the dial plan.  
N
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_1, SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_2, …,  
SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Boolean  
Specifies whether to enable the Shared Call feature of the SIP server,  
which is used to share one line among the units.  
Note  
You cannot set both "SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_[1–8]" and  
"SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_[1–8]" to "Y" at the same  
time.  
Availability depends on your phone system.  
Value Range  
Y(Enable shared call)  
N(Disable shared call)  
Note  
If set to "Y", the SIP server will control the line by using a  
shared-call signaling method.  
If set to "N", the SIP server will control the line by using a  
standard signaling method.  
N
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
176  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
         
4.7.1 Call Control Settings  
SHARED_USER_ID_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SHARED_USER_ID_1, SHARED_USER_ID_2, …,  
SHARED_USER_ID_8  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the unique ID used by the SIP server when  
"SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_[1–8]" is set to "Y".  
Value Range  
Max. 24 characters  
Default Value  
Empty string  
Web User Interface Reference  
SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_1, SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_2,  
…, SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Boolean  
Specifies whether to synchronize the Do Not Disturb and Call Forward  
settings, configured via the Web user interface or phone user interface,  
between the unit and the portal server that is provided by your phone  
system dealer.  
Note  
Even if you specify "Y", this feature may not function properly if  
your phone system does not support it. Before you configure  
this setting, consult your phone system dealer.  
You cannot set both "SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_[1–8]" and  
"SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_[1–8]" to "Y" at the same  
time.  
Value Range  
Y(Enable Do Not Disturb/Call Forward synchronization)  
N(Disable Do Not Disturb/Call Forward synchronization)  
N
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
PRIVACY_MODE_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
Value Format  
PRIVACY_MODE_1, PRIVACY_MODE_2, …, PRIVACY_MODE_8  
Boolean  
Description  
Specifies whether to enable privacy mode, which prohibits another  
handset or base unit from barging in on a conversation.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
177  
               
4.7.2 SIP Settings  
Value Range  
Y(Enable privacy mode)  
N(Disable privacy mode)  
Note  
If set to "Y", the conversation cannot be interrupted by another  
handset or base unit.  
If set to "N", the conversation can be interrupted by another  
handset or base unit.  
Y
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
4.7.2 SIP Settings  
SIP_USER_AGENT  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the text string to send as the user agent in the headers of SIP  
messages.  
Value Range  
Max. 40 characters  
Note  
An empty string is not allowed.  
If "{mac}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with  
the unit’s MAC address in lower-case.  
If "{MAC}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with  
the unit’s MAC address in upper-case.  
If "{MODEL}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced  
with the unit’s model name.  
If "{fwver}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with  
the firmware version of the unit.  
Default Value  
Panasonic_{MODEL}/{fwver} ({mac})  
Web User Interface Reference  
SIP_AUTHID_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
Value Format  
SIP_AUTHID_1, SIP_AUTHID_2, …, SIP_AUTHID_8  
String  
Description  
Specifies the authentication ID required to access the SIP server.  
Max. 64 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)  
Empty string  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
178  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
           
4.7.2 SIP Settings  
SIP_PASS_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
Value Format  
SIP_PASS_1, SIP_PASS_2, …, SIP_PASS_8  
String  
Description  
Specifies the authentication password used to access the SIP server.  
Max. 64 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)  
Empty string  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
SIP_SRC_PORT_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
Value Format  
SIP_SRC_PORT_1, SIP_SRC_PORT_2, …, SIP_SRC_PORT_8  
Integer  
Description  
Specifies the source port number used by the unit for SIP  
communication.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
1024–49151  
Note  
The SIP port number for each line must be unique.  
5060 (for SIP_SRC_PORT_1)  
5070 (for SIP_SRC_PORT_2)  
5080 (for SIP_SRC_PORT_3)  
5090 (for SIP_SRC_PORT_4)  
5100 (for SIP_SRC_PORT_5)  
5110 (for SIP_SRC_PORT_6)  
5120 (for SIP_SRC_PORT_7)  
5130 (for SIP_SRC_PORT_8)  
Web User Interface Reference  
SIP_PRXY_ADDR_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
Value Format  
SIP_PRXY_ADDR_1, SIP_PRXY_ADDR_2, …, SIP_PRXY_ADDR_8  
String  
Description  
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP proxy server.  
Max. 127 characters (IP address in dotted-decimal notation or FQDN)  
Empty string  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
179  
           
4.7.2 SIP Settings  
SIP_PRXY_PORT_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
Value Format  
SIP_PRXY_PORT_1, SIP_PRXY_PORT_2, …, SIP_PRXY_PORT_8  
Integer  
Description  
Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP proxy  
server.  
Value Range  
1–65535  
Default Value  
5060  
Web User Interface Reference  
SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_1, SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_2, …,  
SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_8  
Value Format  
String  
Description  
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP registrar server.  
Max. 127 characters (IP address in dotted-decimal notation or FQDN)  
Empty string  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
SIP_RGSTR_PORT_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SIP_RGSTR_PORT_1, SIP_RGSTR_PORT_2, …,  
SIP_RGSTR_PORT_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP  
registrar server.  
Value Range  
1–65535  
Default Value  
5060  
Web User Interface Reference  
SIP_SVCDOMAIN_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
Value Format  
SIP_SVCDOMAIN_1, SIP_SVCDOMAIN_2, …, SIP_SVCDOMAIN_8  
String  
Description  
Specifies the domain name provided by your phone system dealer. The  
domain name is the part of the SIP URI that comes after the "@" symbol.  
Value Range  
Max. 127 characters  
180  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
               
4.7.2 SIP Settings  
Default Value  
Empty string  
Web User Interface Reference  
REG_EXPIRE_TIME_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
REG_EXPIRE_TIME_1, REG_EXPIRE_TIME_2, …,  
REG_EXPIRE_TIME_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the registration remains  
valid. This value is set in the "Expires" header of the REGISTER  
request.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
1–4294967295  
3600  
REG_INTERVAL_RATE_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
REG_INTERVAL_RATE_1, REG_INTERVAL_RATE_2, …,  
REG_INTERVAL_RATE_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the percentage of the "expires" value after which to refresh  
registration by sending a new REGISTER message in the same dialog.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
1–100  
90  
SIP_SESSION_TIME_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SIP_SESSION_TIME_1, SIP_SESSION_TIME_2, …,  
SIP_SESSION_TIME_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the unit waits before  
terminating SIP sessions when no reply to repeated requests is  
received. For details, refer to RFC 4028.  
Value Range  
0, 60–65535 (0: Disable)  
Default Value  
0
Web User Interface Reference  
TOS_SIP_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
TOS_SIP_1, TOS_SIP_2, …, TOS_SIP_8  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
181  
               
4.7.2 SIP Settings  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the value to be stored in the ToS field in the IP header of SIP  
messages.  
Note  
The structures of the ToS/DS field in an IP header are shown  
below.  
ToS field  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Currently  
unused  
1bit  
Precedence  
3bits  
Type of Service  
4bits  
DS field  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Currently  
unused  
2bits  
DSCP  
6bits  
The ToS field consists of a 3-bit precedence, a 4-bit type of  
service, and a 1-bit unused field.  
The DS filed consists of a 6-bit DSCP and a 2-bit unused field.  
182  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
4.7.2 SIP Settings  
Value Range  
0–255  
Note  
Because the 6-bit DSCP values (i.e., "xxx 000" where "x"="0"  
or "1") in the DS field are converted to the 8-bit DSCP values  
(i.e., "xxx 000 00"), you must specify here the fourfold decimal  
value for 2 bits shifted left. The following listing shows the DSCP  
level of DiffServ and the corresponding decimal value to be  
specified in this parameter.  
Best Effort (default) (000 000 00): 0  
AF11 (DSCP 10) (001 010 00): 40  
AF12 (DSCP 12) (001 100 00): 48  
AF13 (DSCP 14) (001 110 00): 56  
AF21 (DSCP 18) (010 010 00): 72  
AF22 (DSCP 20) (010 100 00): 80  
AF23 (DSCP 22) (010 110 00): 88  
AF31 (DSCP 26) (011 010 00): 104  
AF32 (DSCP 28) (011 100 00): 112  
AF33 (DSCP 30) (011 110 00): 120  
AF41 (DSCP 34) (100 010 00): 136  
AF42 (DSCP 36) (100 100 00): 144  
AF43 (DSCP 38) (100 110 00): 152  
CS1 (ToS 1) (001 000 00): 32  
CS2 (ToS 2) (010 000 00): 64  
CS3 (ToS 3) (011 000 00): 96  
CS4 (ToS 4) (100 000 00): 128  
CS5 (ToS 5) (101 000 00): 160  
CS6 (ToS 6) (110 000 00): 192  
CS7 (ToS 7) (111 000 00): 224  
EF (Expedited Forwarding) (DSCP 46) (101 110 00): 184  
Default Value  
0
Web User Interface Reference  
SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR_1, SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR_2, …,  
SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR_8  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the IP address of the secondary SIP proxy server.  
Note  
This setting is available only when "SIP_PRXY_ADDR_[1–  
8]" is specified in IP address notation.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
IP address in dotted-decimal notation  
Empty string  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
183  
   
4.7.2 SIP Settings  
SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_1, SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_2, …,  
SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the port number to use for communication with the secondary  
SIP proxy server.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
1–65535  
5060  
SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_1, SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_2, …,  
SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_8  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the IP address of the secondary SIP registrar server.  
Note  
This setting is available only when "SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_[1–  
8]" is specified in IP address notation.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
IP address in dotted-decimal notation  
Empty string  
SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_1, SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_2, …,  
SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the port number to use for communication with the secondary  
SIP registrar server.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
1–65535  
5060  
SIP_TIMER_T1_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
Value Format  
SIP_TIMER_T1_1, SIP_TIMER_T1_2, …, SIP_TIMER_T1_8  
Integer  
Description  
Specifies the default interval, in milliseconds, between transmissions of  
SIP messages. For details, refer to RFC 3261.  
184  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
               
4.7.2 SIP Settings  
Value Range  
250  
500  
1000  
2000  
4000  
Default Value  
500  
Web User Interface Reference  
SIP_TIMER_T2_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
Value Format  
SIP_TIMER_T2_1, SIP_TIMER_T2_2, …, SIP_TIMER_T2_8  
Integer  
Description  
Specifies the maximum interval, in seconds, between transmissions of  
SIP messages. For details, refer to RFC 3261.  
Value Range  
2
4
8
16  
32  
Default Value  
4
Web User Interface Reference  
INVITE_RTXN_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
Value Format  
INVITE_RTXN_1, INVITE_RTXN_2, …, INVITE_RTXN_8  
Integer  
Description  
Specifies the number of times that INVITE requests are retransmitted  
when no reply is received from the server.  
Value Range  
1–6  
Default Value  
6
Web User Interface Reference  
OTHER_RTXN_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
Value Format  
OTHER_RTXN_1, OTHER_RTXN_2, …, OTHER_RTXN_8  
Integer  
Description  
Specifies the number of times that non-INVITE requests (general SIP  
messages) are retransmitted when no reply is received from the server.  
Value Range  
1–10  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
185  
           
4.7.2 SIP Settings  
Default Value  
10  
Web User Interface Reference  
SIP_FOVR_NORSP_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SIP_FOVR_NORSP_1, SIP_FOVR_NORSP_2, …,  
SIP_FOVR_NORSP_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Boolean  
Specifies whether to perform the fail-over process when the unit detects  
that the SIP server is not replying to SIP message.  
Value Range  
Y(Enable fail-over)  
N(Disable fail-over)  
Note  
If set to "Y", the unit will try to use the other SIP servers via the  
DNS SRV and A records.  
If set to "N", the unit will not try to use the other SIP servers.  
N
Default Value  
SIP_FOVR_MAX_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
Value Format  
SIP_FOVR_MAX_1, SIP_FOVR_MAX_2, …, SIP_FOVR_MAX_8  
Integer  
Description  
Specifies the maximum number of servers (including the first [normal]  
server) used in the fail-over process.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
1–4  
2
SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_1, SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_2, …,  
SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Boolean  
Specifies whether to request the DNS server to translate domain names  
into IP addresses using the SRV record.  
186  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
           
4.7.2 SIP Settings  
Value Range  
Y(Enable DNS SRV lookup)  
N(Disable DNS SRV lookup)  
Note  
If set to "Y", the unit will perform a DNS SRV lookup for a SIP  
registrar server, SIP proxy server, SIP outbound proxy server,  
or SIP presence server.  
If set to "N", the unit will not perform a DNS SRV lookup for a  
SIP registrar server, SIP proxy server, SIP outbound proxy  
server, or SIP presence server.  
N
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_1, SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_2, …,  
SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_8  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS  
SRV lookup using UDP.  
Note  
This setting is available only when "SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_[1–  
8]" is set to "Y".  
Value Range  
Max. 32 characters  
Default Value  
_sip._udp.  
Web User Interface Reference  
SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_1, SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_2, …,  
SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_8  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS  
SRV lookup using TCP.  
Note  
This setting is available only when "SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_[1–  
8]" is set to "Y".  
Value Range  
Max. 32 characters  
Default Value  
_sip._tcp.  
Web User Interface Reference  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
187  
       
4.7.2 SIP Settings  
SIP_100REL_ENABLE_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SIP_100REL_ENABLE_1, SIP_100REL_ENABLE_2, …,  
SIP_100REL_ENABLE_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Boolean  
Specifies whether to add the option tag 100rel to the "Supported"  
header of the INVITE message. For details, refer to RFC 3262.  
Value Range  
Y(Enable 100rel function)  
N(Disable 100rel function)  
Note  
If set to "Y", the Reliability of Provisional Responses function  
will be enabled. The option tag 100rel will be added to the  
"Supported" header of the INVITE message and to the  
"Require" header of the "1xx" provisional message.  
If set to "N", the option tag 100rel will not be used.  
N
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_1, SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_2, …,  
SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Integer  
Specifies the retransmission interval, in seconds, for "18x" responses.  
0, 1–600 (0: Disable)  
0
SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_1, SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_2, …,  
SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_8  
Value Format  
String  
Description  
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP presence server.  
Max. 127 characters (IP address in dotted-decimal notation or FQDN)  
Empty string  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
188  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
             
4.7.2 SIP Settings  
SIP_PRSNC_PORT_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SIP_PRSNC_PORT_1, SIP_PRSNC_PORT_2, …,  
SIP_PRSNC_PORT_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP  
presence server.  
Value Range  
1–65535  
Default Value  
5060  
Web User Interface Reference  
SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_1, SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_2, …,  
SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_8  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the IP address of the secondary presence server.  
Note  
This setting is available only when "SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_[1–  
8]" is specified in IP address notation.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
IP address in dotted-decimal notation  
Empty string  
SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_1, SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_2, …,  
SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the port number to use for communication with the secondary  
SIP presence server.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
1–65535  
5060  
USE_DEL_REG_OPEN_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
USE_DEL_REG_OPEN_1, USE_DEL_REG_OPEN_2, …,  
USE_DEL_REG_OPEN_8  
Value Format  
Boolean  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
189  
               
4.7.2 SIP Settings  
Description  
Value Range  
Specifies whether to enable cancelation before registration when, for  
example, the unit is turned on.  
Y(Enable cancelation before registration)  
N(Disable cancelation before registration)  
N
Default Value  
USE_DEL_REG_CLOSE_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
USE_DEL_REG_CLOSE_1, USE_DEL_REG_CLOSE_2, …,  
USE_DEL_REG_CLOSE_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Boolean  
Specifies whether to enable the cancelation of registration before the  
SIP function shuts down when, for example, the configuration has  
changed.  
Value Range  
Y(Enable registration cancelation before shutting down)  
N(Disable registration cancelation before shutting down)  
Note  
If set to "Y", registration cancelation is enabled.  
If set to "N", registration cancelation is disabled even when the  
SIP stack is shutting down.  
N
Default Value  
PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_1, PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_2, …,  
PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between transmissions of the Keep  
Alive packet to the unit in order to maintain the NAT binding information.  
Note  
This setting is available only when "SIP_TRANSPORT_[1–  
8]" is set to "0" for UDP.  
Value Range  
0, 10–300 (0: Disable)  
Default Value  
0
Web User Interface Reference  
SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_1, SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_2, …,  
SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_8  
190  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
             
4.7.2 SIP Settings  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the subscription remains  
valid. This value is set in the "Expires" header of the SUBSCRIBE  
request.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
1–4294967295  
3600  
SUB_RTX_INTVL_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
Value Format  
SUB_RTX_INTVL_1, SUB_RTX_INTVL_2, …, SUB_RTX_INTVL_8  
Integer  
Description  
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between transmissions of  
SUBSCRIBE requests when a subscription results in failure (server no  
reply or error reply).  
Value Range  
Default Value  
10–86400  
10  
REG_RTX_INTVL_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
Value Format  
REG_RTX_INTVL_1, REG_RTX_INTVL_2, …, REG_RTX_INTVL_8  
Integer  
Description  
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between transmissions of the  
REGISTER request when a registration results in failure (server no  
reply or error reply).  
Value Range  
Default Value  
10–86400  
10  
SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_1, SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_2, …,  
SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Boolean  
Specifies whether to add the "P-Preferred-Identity" header to SIP  
messages.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Y(Add the "P-Preferred-Identity" header)  
N(Do not add the "P-Preferred-Identity" header)  
N
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
191  
           
4.7.2 SIP Settings  
SIP_PRIVACY_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
Value Format  
SIP_PRIVACY_1, SIP_PRIVACY_2, …, SIP_PRIVACY_8  
Boolean  
Description  
Specifies whether to add the "Privacy" header to SIP messages.  
Value Range  
Y(Add the "Privacy" header)  
N(Do not add the "Privacy" header)  
N
Default Value  
ADD_USER_PHONE_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
ADD_USER_PHONE_1, ADD_USER_PHONE_2, …,  
ADD_USER_PHONE_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Boolean  
Specifies whether to add "user=phone" to the SIP URI in SIP  
messages.  
Value Range  
Y(Add "user=phone")  
N(Do not add "user=phone")  
Note  
SIP URI example:  
"sip:[email protected];user=phone",  
when set to "Y"  
"sip:[email protected]", when set to "N"  
N
Default Value  
SDP_USER_ID_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
Value Format  
SDP_USER_ID_1, SDP_USER_ID_2, …, SDP_USER_ID_8  
String  
Description  
Specifies the user ID used in the "o=" line field of SDP.  
Value Range  
Max. 32 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)  
-
Default Value  
SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
Value Format  
SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_1, SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_2, …,  
SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_8  
Integer  
192  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
               
4.7.2 SIP Settings  
Description  
Specifies the percentage of the "expires" value after which to refresh  
subscriptions by sending a new SUBSCRIBE message in the same  
dialog.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
1–100  
90  
SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_1, SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_2, …,  
SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_8  
Value Format  
String  
Description  
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP outbound proxy server.  
Max. 127 characters (IP address in dotted-decimal notation or FQDN)  
Empty string  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_1, SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_2, …,  
SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP  
outbound proxy server.  
Value Range  
1–65535  
Default Value  
5060  
Web User Interface Reference  
SIP_TRANSPORT_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
Value Format  
SIP_TRANSPORT_1, SIP_TRANSPORT_2, …, SIP_TRANSPORT_8  
Integer  
Description  
Specifies which transport layer protocol to use for sending SIP packets.  
Note  
Changing this setting may require restarting the unit.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
193  
           
4.7.2 SIP Settings  
Value Range  
0 (UDP)  
1 (TCP)  
Note  
All the parameters from "SIP_TRANSPORT_1" to  
"SIP_TRANSPORT_8" must have the same value.  
Default Value  
0
Web User Interface Reference  
SIP_ANM_DISPNAME_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SIP_ANM_DISPNAME_1, SIP_ANM_DISPNAME_2, …,  
SIP_ANM_DISPNAME_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the text string to set as the display name in the "From" header  
when making anonymous calls.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
0 (Use normal display name)  
1 (Use "Anonymous" for display name)  
2 (Do not send a display name)  
1
SIP_ANM_USERNAME_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SIP_ANM_USERNAME_1, SIP_ANM_USERNAME_2, …,  
SIP_ANM_USERNAME_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Integer  
Specifies the text string to set as the user name in the "From" header  
when making anonymous calls.  
Value Range  
Default Value  
0 (Use normal user name)  
1 (Use "anonymous" for user name)  
2 (Do not send a user name)  
0
SIP_ANM_HOSTNAME_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SIP_ANM_HOSTNAME_1, SIP_ANM_HOSTNAME_2, …,  
SIP_ANM_HOSTNAME_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Boolean  
Specifies whether to set an anonymous host name in the "From" header  
when making anonymous calls.  
194  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
           
4.7.2 SIP Settings  
Value Range  
Default Value  
Y(Use "anonymous.invalid" for host name)  
N(Use normal host name)  
N
SIP_DETECT_SSAF_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
SIP_DETECT_SSAF_1, SIP_DETECT_SSAF_2, …,  
SIP_DETECT_SSAF_8  
Value Format  
Description  
Boolean  
Specifies whether to enable SSAF for the SIP servers (registrar server,  
proxy server, and presence server).  
Value Range  
Y(Enable SSAF)  
N(Disable SSAF)  
Note  
If set to "Y", the unit receives SIP messages only from the  
source addresses stored in the SIP servers (registrar server,  
proxy server, and presence server), and not from other  
addresses. However, if "SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_[1–8]" in  
4.7.2 SIP Settings is specified, the unit also receives SIP  
messages from the source address stored in the SIP outbound  
proxy server.  
N
Default Value  
Web User Interface Reference  
PHONE_NUMBER_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
Value Format  
PHONE_NUMBER_1, PHONE_NUMBER_2, …, PHONE_NUMBER_8  
String  
Description  
Specifies the phone number to use as the user ID required for  
registration to the SIP registrar server.  
Value Range  
Max. 24 characters (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)  
Note  
No other characters are allowed.  
Default Value  
Empty string  
Web User Interface Reference  
DISPLAY_NAME_[1–8]  
Parameter Name Example  
Value Format  
DISPLAY_NAME_1, DISPLAY_NAME_2, …, DISPLAY_NAME_8  
String  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
195  
             
4.7.2 SIP Settings  
Description  
Value Range  
Specifies the name to display as the caller on the other party’s phone  
when you make a call.  
Max. 16 characters or 32 bytes  
Note  
You can use Unicode characters for this setting.  
Default Value  
Empty string  
Web User Interface Reference  
INTERNATIONAL_ACCESS_CODE  
Value Format  
Description  
String  
Specifies the number to be shown in the place of the first "+" symbol  
when the phone number for incoming international calls contains "+".  
Value Range  
Max. 8 characters (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)  
Note  
No other characters are allowed.  
Default Value  
Empty string ("+" is deleted)  
196  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
   
Section 5  
Useful Telephone Functions  
This section explains phone number settings for the  
base unit or handsets, dial plan, and phonebook import/  
export function.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
197  
 
5.1.1 Multi Number Settings  
5.1 Line Settings for Base Unit and Handset  
5.1.1 Multi Number Settings  
A unit can be used with a single base unit and 6 handsets.  
You can assign a maximum of 8 different phone numbers for the base unit (KX-TGP550 only) and handsets.  
Each available phone number (line) can be assigned to the base unit and handsets as desired to handle  
incoming and outgoing calls.  
Programming Example 1  
The following programming example shows a configuration where the base unit and handsets have their own  
phone numbers, and the base unit and handsets also share a common phone number.  
You can program this table using Web user interface programming (® see 3.7.1.1 Grouping Handset/  
[Grouping Handset/Handset selection for receiving calls]  
Handset No.  
Phone  
Line No.  
Base  
Number  
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1111  
2222  
3333  
4444  
5555  
6666  
7777  
8888  
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Case 1:  
A call dialed to "1111" will be received by handset 1.  
Case 2:  
A call dialed to "2222" will be received by handset 2.  
Case 3:  
A call dialed to "8888" will be received by the base unit and handsets 1–6.  
198  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
     
5.2 Phonebook Import and Export  
Programming Example 2  
The following programming example shows a configuration where handsets 1–3 dial with lines 1–3,  
respectively. Each handset uses the line set in [Default] by default.  
You can program this table using Web user interface programming (® see 3.7.1.2 Handset and Line No.  
[Handset and Line No. selection for making calls]  
Line No.  
Handset  
Default  
No.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1
2
3
2
3
4
5
6
Base  
Case 1:  
When a user goes off-hook with handset 1, line 1 is seized and dialed by default. Line 2 and line 3 can also  
be seized and dialed.  
Case 2:  
When a user goes off-hook with handset 2, line 2 is seized and dialed by default. Line 1 and line 3 can also  
be seized and dialed.  
Case 3:  
When a user goes off-hook with handset 3, line 3 is seized and dialed by default. Line 1 and line 2 can also  
be seized and dialed.  
Note  
You can make a call with one of the phone numbers other than the default phone number. For details  
about the operations, refer to the User Guide or Quick Guide on the Panasonic Web site (® see  
5.2 Phonebook Import and Export  
This section explains how to import and export phonebook data. Phonebook data of the unit includes names  
and phone numbers.  
Phonebook data on the unit can be exported, edited with editor tools, and imported again. In addition,  
phonebook data created with other software can be imported into the unit.  
You can use the phonebook import and export functions as follows.  
Editing Phonebook Data on a PC  
The phonebook data stored on the unit can be edited using a program such as Microsoft Excel® spreadsheet  
software. For details about the operation, see 5.2.2 Editing with Microsoft Excel.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
199  
   
5.2 Phonebook Import and Export  
You can export the phonebook data to the PC, edit the exported file using appropriate software, and then import  
it into the unit.  
A
B
Phonebook  
data  
Microsoft  
Excel  
D
C
Importing Address Book Data from a PC  
You can import address book data stored in programs, such as Microsoft Outlook® messaging and collaboration  
client, into the unit.  
First, export address book data from the e-mail software to a program such as Microsoft Excel, edit it as  
necessary, and then import the exported data into the unit.  
For details about the operation, see 5.2.3 Exporting Data from Microsoft Outlook.  
Phonebook  
data  
Microsoft  
Excel  
Microsoft  
Outlook  
C
B
A
Backing up Phonebook Data  
You can export the phonebook data from the unit to a PC and keep the file as a backup in case of data loss  
or for use when exchanging the base unit or handset.  
A
Phonebook  
data  
B
Importing the Same Phonebook Data to the Base Unit, Handset, or Another Unit  
You can export the phonebook data created on a unit to a PC, and then import it into other base units, handsets,  
or another unit.  
A
Phonebook  
B
data  
200  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
 
5.2 Phonebook Import and Export  
You can also import phonebook data created on a PC to other base units, handsets, or another unit.  
Phonebook  
data  
Microsoft  
Excel  
B
A
Import/Export File Format  
The file format used for importing and exporting the phonebook data is "TSV". When importing or exporting  
using Microsoft Excel, "CSV (Comma-separated Value)" is generally used as the file format.  
A phonebook entry in the unit has only 2 fields: one for the name and one for the phone number. An entry in  
the phonebook data is represented in text as "name <TAB> phone number <line break>". Any data after the  
phone number is ignored.  
The text data can be edited using any text editing software that supports UTF-16 encoding with a BOM and  
little endian byte ordering. When you save the text file, it must be saved using the same format, or the text  
might become garbled.  
Phonebook Data in Text Format  
A
B
C
Aaron MacDowel  
Barbara Nicolls  
Carl O’Brien  
Dorothy Parker  
····  
01234001  
01234002  
01234003  
01234004  
····  
····  
····  
A Name  
B Tab  
C Phone number  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
201  
     
5.2.1 Import/Export Operation  
Phonebook Data in Binary Format  
A
B
C D  
A BOM  
B Space between the first name and last name  
C Tab  
D Line feed  
5.2.1 Import/Export Operation  
The following procedures explain how to import phonebook data to units, and how to export phonebook data  
from units to a PC through the Web user interface.  
For details about the settings, see 3.7.5 Import Phonebook or 3.7.6 Export Phonebook.  
To import phonebook data  
1. Click the [Telephone] tab, and then click [Import Phonebook].  
2. In [Import Phonebook], select the base unit (KX-TGP550 only) or the handset that you want to import  
data into.  
3. In [File Name], enter the full path to the file that you want to import, or click Browse to select the phonebook  
data file that you want to import.  
4. Click [Import].  
To export the phonebook data  
1. Click the [Telephone] tab, and then click [Export Phonebook].  
2. In [Export Phonebook], select the base unit (KX-TGP550 only) or the handset that you want to export  
data from.  
3. Click [Export].  
4. On the "Now Processing File Data" screen, click the text "HERE" in the displayed message, or wait until  
File Download window appears.  
Note  
Depending on the security settings of your Web browser, pop-up menus might be blocked. If the  
file cannot be exported successfully, try the export operation again or change the security settings  
of your Web browser.  
5. Click Save on File Download window.  
6. On the Save As window, select a folder to save the exported phonebook data to, enter the file name in  
File name, select TSV File for Save as type, and click Save.  
If the file is downloaded successfully, the Download complete window appears.  
7. Click Close.  
8. To exit the operation, click the text "HERE" in the displayed message.  
The [Export Phonebook] screen returns.  
202  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
             
5.2.2 Editing with Microsoft Excel  
Note  
Make sure that the import source or target unit (base unit or handset) is in standby mode.  
The import source or target unit (base unit or handset) must be specified at the time of import/export.  
The imported data is added to the existing phonebook data.  
If the existing phonebook data has an entry with the same name as the imported entry but the  
phone number is different, the imported entry is added as a new entry.  
If the existing phonebook data has an entry with the same name and phone number as an imported  
entry, the entry is not added.  
The phonebook for a unit has the following limitations:  
A maximum of 100 phonebook entries can be stored in the base unit (KX-TGP550 only) and each  
of the handsets. If the base unit or handset already has phonebook data, it accepts up to the 100th  
entry, including the existing entries. The rest of the entries will not be imported, and the  
message "Memory Full" is displayed on the unit.  
The name can contain up to 16 characters.  
The phone number can contain up to 32 digits.  
Phonebook entries exceeding the characters or digits limits cannot be imported properly.  
If the export is interrupted by an operation on the base unit (KX-TGP550 only) or handset, only the  
data that has been successfully exported before the interruption is exported to a file.  
5.2.2 Editing with Microsoft Excel  
You can edit exported phonebook data on a PC with software such as Microsoft Excel. You can then import  
the phonebook data into units.  
To open the phonebook data on a PC  
1. Open Microsoft Excel.  
2. Click Office Button, and then Open.  
Note  
Make sure to open a TSV file in this procedure. If you change the extension of a TSV file  
to ".csv", the file will open by simply double-clicking it. However, the character encoding of the file  
might not be recognized properly, resulting in garbled characters, or the phone numbers might be  
recognized as numbers, resulting in data alteration.  
3. Select All Files for the file type, select the exported phonebook data file, and click Open.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
203  
     
5.2.2 Editing with Microsoft Excel  
4. On the Text Import Wizard - Step 1 of 3 window, click Next.  
Note  
Regardless of what is selected for File origin, the file will be processed normally if the format is  
appropriate.  
5. On the Text Import Wizard - Step 2 of 3 window, select Tab for Delimiters, and then click Next.  
6. On the Text Import Wizard - Step 3 of 3 window, select all columns in Data preview, select Text in  
Column data format, and then click Finish.  
The TSV file will be opened.  
Note  
Phone numbers must be treated as text strings. Otherwise, a "0" at the beginning of a phone  
number might disappear when exported.  
204  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
5.3 Dial Plan  
To save the phonebook data for importing to the unit  
1. After editing the phonebook entries, click Office Button, and then Save As.  
2. Enter a file name in File name, and select Unicode Text in Save as type.  
The file will be saved in UTF-16 little endian with a BOM. Fields will be separated by tabs.  
3. Click Save.  
A message warning you about file compatibility will be displayed.  
4. Click Yes.  
The file will be saved as a Unicode text file, with the fields separated by tabs.  
Note  
The procedure may vary depending on the software version of Microsoft Excel. Therefore, files  
exported and imported between the unit and Microsoft Excel are not always compatible with each other.  
5.2.3 Exporting Data from Microsoft Outlook  
You can export address book data stored in programs such as Microsoft Outlook, and then edit the exported  
data with a program such as Microsoft Excel in order to import it to the unit.  
To export the Microsoft Outlook address book data  
1. In Microsoft Outlook, click File, and then click Import and Export.  
2. Select Export to a file, and click Next.  
3. Select Tab Separated Values (Windows), and click Next.  
4. Select Contacts, and click Next.  
5. Click Browse, select a folder, and then enter the file name to export the data to.  
6. Click OK.  
7. On the Export to a File window, click Next.  
8. Click Map Custom Fields.  
9. Clear all items in the To list by clicking Clear Map. Then, drag only Last Name and Business Phone from  
the From list to the To list, and click OK.  
10. On the Export to a File window, click Finish.  
The data will be exported.  
Note  
You can export data from Microsoft Outlook Express by using a similar procedure. It is also possible  
to export data from other applications that are compatible with Microsoft Excel.  
You can open the exported file in Microsoft Excel, and then import it to the unit. For details, see  
First and middle names are not exported using this procedure. You can export all necessary items and  
edit the entry before importing them to the unit.  
In the file exported from Microsoft Outlook, fields are separated by tabs and encoded using the default  
character encoding for your operating system.  
5.3 Dial Plan  
The dial plan settings control how numbers dialed by the user are transmitted over the network. Dial plan  
settings can be configured on a per-line basis. These settings can be programmed either through the Web  
user interface (® see 3.7.3.2 Dial Plan) or by configuration file programming (® see 4.7.1 Call Control  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
205  
     
5.3.1 Dial Plan Settings  
[Dial Plan Flowchart]  
When a user dials a single digit on a unit, the following sequence of events begins.  
A user dials a single digit on the unit.  
The unit stores the dialed digits.  
A
The unit compares the dialed digits with each dial plan.  
No  
Do the dialed digits fully or  
partially match in the dial plan?  
No Match  
Yes  
Has [Call Even If  
Dial Plan Does  
Not Match] been  
set to [Yes]?  
Complete Match  
Partial Match  
No  
Does the dial  
plan contain "!"  
for number  
barring?  
Does the dial plan  
contain "." for element  
repetition?  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
The call is denied.  
Yes  
No  
Does the user  
press the # key?  
No  
The call is initiated.  
No  
Yes  
Does the dialed number of  
digits exceed the number  
of digits up to 2 characters  
before "." in the dial plan?  
The call is denied.  
The call is initiated.  
No  
Does the user  
press the # key?  
The inter-digit timer starts.  
Yes  
B
To  
B
Yes  
Does the user  
press the # key?  
Yes  
Has [Call Even If  
The call is initiated.  
No  
Dial Plan Does Not  
Match] been set to  
[Yes]?  
No  
Does the user dial  
the subsequent digit  
before the inter-digit timer  
expires?  
Yes  
The inter-digit timer starts.  
Yes  
The call is denied.  
No  
Does the user dial  
the subsequent digit  
before the inter-digit  
timer expires?  
To  
A
Yes  
The call is initiated.  
Has [Call Even If  
Dial Plan Does Not  
Match] been set to  
[Yes]?  
Yes  
No  
To  
A
No  
The call is initiated.  
The call is denied.  
5.3.1 Dial Plan Settings  
To set Dial Plan  
1. In the Web user interface, click the [Telephone] tab, and then click [Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 8]].  
2. In [Dial Plan], enter the desired dial format.  
The dial plan settings can be configured for each line separately.  
206  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
     
5.3.1 Dial Plan Settings  
For details about available characters for the dial format, see Available Values for the Dial Plan Field in  
this section.  
3. Select [Yes] or [No] for [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match].  
If you select [Yes], the call will be made even if the user dials a phone number that does not match  
the dial format in [Dial Plan].  
If you select [No], the call will be made only if the user dials a phone number that matches the dial  
format in [Dial Plan].  
Note  
For details about configuring these settings by configuration file programming, see "DIAL_PLAN_[1–  
8]" and "DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_[1–8]" in 4.7.1 Call Control Settings.  
Available Values for the Dial Plan Field  
The following table explains which characters you can use in the dial format, and what the characters mean.  
Element  
String  
Available Value  
Description  
0–9, [, -, ], <, :, >, *, #, !, You can enter dial plan descriptions using a combination of  
S, s, X, x, ., |  
0–9, *, #  
the characters listed as available values.  
Digit  
Example: "123"  
If the dialed phone number is "123", the call is made  
immediately.  
Wildcard  
Range  
X, x  
[ ]  
Example: "12xxxxx"  
If the dialed phone number is "12" followed by any 5-digit  
number, the call is made immediately.  
Example: "[123]"  
If the dialed phone number is either one of "1", "2", or "3", the  
call is made immediately.  
Subrange  
-
Example: "[1-5]"  
If the dialed phone number is "1", "2", "3", "4", or "5", the call  
is made immediately.  
A subrange is only valid for single-digit numbers. For  
example, "[4-9]" is valid, but "[12-21]" is invalid.  
Repeat  
.
Example: "1."  
If the dialed phone number is "1" followed by zero or more  
"1"s (e.g., "11", "111"), the call is made.  
Substitution  
Timer  
<(before):(after)>  
S, s (second)  
Example: "<101:9999>"  
If the dialed phone number is "101", "101" is replaced by  
"9999", and then the call is made immediately.  
Example: "1x.S2"  
If the dialed phone number begins with "1", the call is made  
after a lapse of 2 seconds.  
The number (0–9) followed by "S" or "s" shows the  
duration in seconds until the call is made.  
Reject  
!
Example: "123xxx!"  
If the dialed phone number is "123" followed by 3 digits, the  
call is not made.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
207  
     
5.3.1 Dial Plan Settings  
Element  
Available Value  
Description  
Example: "1xxxx|2xxx"  
Alternation  
|
If the dialed phone number is "1" followed by 4 digits, or "2"  
followed by 3 digits, the call is made immediately.  
You can use this element to specify multiple numbers.  
Note  
You can enter up to 500 characters in [Dial Plan].  
You can assign up to 20 dial plans separated by "|" in [Dial Plan].  
You can assign up to 32 digits per dial plan in [Dial Plan].  
After the user completes dialing, the unit immediately sends all the dialed digits if [Call Even If Dial  
Plan Does Not Match] is set to [Yes] in the Web user interface or  
if "DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_[1-8]" is set to "Y" in a configuration file. The unit recognizes  
the end of dialing as follows:  
The inter-digit timer expires (® see [Inter-digit Timeout] in 3.7.2.1 Call Control in the Web user  
interface or "INTDIGIT_TIM" in 4.5.1 Call Control Settings in the configuration file).  
The user presses the # key.  
The call is initiated after going off-hook (pre-dial).  
Dial Plan Example  
The following example shows dial plans containing character sequences separated by "|".  
Example: "[2346789]11|01[2-9]xx.|[2-9]xxxxxxxxx"  
Complete Match:  
Example: "[2346789]11|01[2-9]xx.|[2-9]xxxxxxxxx"  
If the dialed phone number is "211", "911" and so on, the call is made immediately.  
Example: "[2346789]11|01[2-9]xx.|[2-9]xxxxxxxxx"  
If the dialed phone number is "2123456789", "5987654321" and so on, the call is made immediately.  
Partial Match (when the dial plan contains "."):  
Example: "[2346789]11|01[2-9]xx.|[2-9]xxxxxxxxx"  
If the dialed phone number is "01254", "012556" and so on, the call is made after the inter-digit timer expires.  
If the dialed phone number is "01254#", "012556#" and so on, the call is made immediately.  
Partial Match (when the dial plan does not contain "."):  
Example: "[2346789]11|01[2-9]xx.|[2-9]xxxxxxxxx"  
If the dialed phone number is "21", "91" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match] is set  
to [Yes], the call is made after the inter-digit timer expires.  
If the dialed phone number is "21#", "91#" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match] is  
set to [Yes], the call is made immediately.  
If the dialed phone number is "21", "91" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match] is set  
to [No], the call is denied after the inter-digit timer expires.  
If the dialed phone number is "21#", "91#" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match] is  
set to [No], the call is denied.  
Example: "[2346789]11|01[2-9]xx.|[2-9]xxxxxxxxx"  
If the dialed phone number is "21234567", "598765432" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not  
Match] is set to [Yes], the call is made after the inter-digit timer expires.  
208  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
 
5.3.1 Dial Plan Settings  
If the dialed phone number is "21234567#", "598765432#" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does  
Not Match] is set to [Yes], the call is made immediately.  
If the dialed phone number is "21234567", "598765432" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not  
Match] is set to [No], the call is denied after the inter-digit timer expires.  
If the dialed phone number is "21234567#", "598765432#" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does  
Not Match] is set to [No], the call is denied.  
No Match:  
Example: "[2346789]11|01[2-9]xx.|[2-9]xxxxxxxxx"  
If the dialed phone number is "0011", "1011" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match] is  
set to [Yes], the call is made after the inter-digit timer expires.  
If the dialed phone number is "0011#", "1011#" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not  
Match] is set to [Yes], the call is made immediately.  
If the dialed phone number is "0011", "1011" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match] is  
set to [No], the call is denied.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
209  
5.3.1 Dial Plan Settings  
210  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Section 6  
Firmware Update  
This section explains how to update the firmware of the  
unit.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
211  
   
6.2 Firmware Update Settings  
6.1 Firmware Server Setup  
No special server is necessary for the firmware update. You can use an HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, or TFTP server  
as the firmware server by simply setting its URL.  
6.2 Firmware Update Settings  
Firmware updates are provided by the manufacturer when necessary.  
The firmware update will be executed by setting the corresponding parameters using configuration file  
programming (® see 4.3.4 Firmware Update Settings) or Web user interface programming (® see  
3.8.1 Firmware Maintenance). The following shows the parameters and the setting procedures:  
Firmware Update Enable/Disable  
In a configuration file, add the line, FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE="Y".  
In the Web user interface, click the [Maintenance] tab, click [Firmware Maintenance], and then select  
[Yes] for [Enable Firmware Update].  
Firmware Version Number for Europe Model  
In a configuration file, specify the new version number of the Europe model in "FIRM_VER_EUDECT".  
Firmware Version Number for North America Model  
In a configuration file, specify the new version number of the North America model  
in "FIRM_VER_USDECT".  
Automatic Update  
In a configuration file, add the line, FIRM_UPGRADE_AUTO="Y".  
In the Web user interface, click the [Maintenance] tab, click [Firmware Maintenance], and then select  
[Automatic] for [Update Type].  
Firmware Server URL  
In a configuration file, specify the URL in "FIRM_FILE_PATH".  
In the Web user interface, click the [Maintenance] tab, click [Firmware Maintenance], and then enter the  
URL in [Firmware File URL].  
Configuration Parameter Example  
By setting the parameters as shown in the following example, the unit will automatically download the firmware  
file from the specified URL, "http://firm.example.com/firm/EUDECT01.05.fw", and perform the update operation  
if the currently used firmware version is older than 01.05.  
Example  
FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE="Y"  
FIRM_VER_EUDECT="01.05"  
# FIRM_VER_USDECT # not needed for EU-DECT phone  
FIRM_UPGRADE_AUTO="Y"  
FIRM_FILE_PATH="http://firm.example.com/firm/EUDECT01.05.fw"  
212  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
         
6.4 Local Firmware Update  
6.3 Executing Firmware Update  
After configuring the firmware update settings in the configuration file, the firmware will be updated when the  
configuration file is downloaded.  
The firmware update will be performed only when a newer version of the firmware file (i.e., one that has a larger  
version number) than the firmware currently used is specified in the downloaded configuration file.  
If the firmware update settings are properly configured in the configuration file, the firmware update will be  
executed when the unit is restarted. You can restart the unit to execute firmware update immediately.  
For details about downloading configuration files, see 1.1.6.4 Downloading Configuration Files.  
6.4 Local Firmware Update  
When an updated version of the firmware is provided on a Web site or other means, you can perform the  
firmware update manually using Web user interface programming.  
For details about the local firmware update, see 3.8.2 Local Firmware Update.  
To manually update the firmware  
1. In the Web user interface, click the [Maintenance] tab, and then click [Local Firmware Update].  
2. Click Browse, select the folder where the firmware file is stored, and specify the firmware file on your PC.  
3. Click [Update Firmware].  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
213  
         
6.4 Local Firmware Update  
214  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Section 7  
Troubleshooting  
This section provides information about  
troubleshooting.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
215  
   
7.1 Troubleshooting  
7.1 Troubleshooting  
If you still have difficulties after following the instructions in this section, disconnect the base unit’s AC adaptor,  
then reconnect the base unit’s AC adaptor. Remove the batteries from the handset, and then insert the batteries  
into the handset again.  
General Use  
Problem  
Cause/Solution  
I cannot hear a dial tone.  
Confirm that the Ethernet cable is properly connected. For  
details, refer to the Quick Guide on the Panasonic Web site  
(® see Introduction).  
Network settings may not be correct.  
Many installation issues can be resolved by resetting all  
the equipment. First, shut down your modem, router, hub,  
base unit, and PC. Then turn the devices back on, one at  
a time, in this order: modem, router, hub, base unit, PC.  
If you cannot access Internet Web pages using your PC,  
check to see if your phone system is having connection  
issues in your area.  
Check the VoIP status in the Web user interface and  
confirm that each line is registered properly (® see To  
this section).  
Check that the SIP server address, URLs of the  
configuration files, encryption key, and other required  
settings are correct.  
Check the firewall and port forwarding settings on the  
router (® see 1.1.10 Other Network Settings).  
For details about the settings, consult your network  
administrator or phone system dealer.  
216  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
 
7.1 Troubleshooting  
STATUS Indicator (in cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in English alphabet) or  
Indicator (in cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in symbols/pictures)  
Problem  
Cause/Solution  
An IP address may not have been acquired or the static IP  
address is not appropriate. Check the unit’s IP address:  
The STATUS indicator or  
continues flashing in amber.  
indicator  
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in  
English alphabet  
Base unit (KX-TGP550 only):  
[MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][5][0][1]  
Handset:  
[MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][5][0][1]  
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in  
symbols/pictures  
Base unit (KX-TGP550 only):  
(middle soft key) ® [#][5][0][1]  
Handset:  
(center of joystick) ® [#][5][0][1]  
It is recommended to perform the following.  
If necessary, change the unit’s static IP address.  
If an IP address was not acquired, check your network  
devices’ (router, modem, etc.) connections. If the  
connections are made properly but the problem  
persists, check your network devices’ (router, modem,  
etc.) settings.  
Many installation issues can be resolved by resetting all  
the equipment. First, shut down your modem, router, hub,  
base unit, and PC. Then turn the devices back on, one at  
a time, in this order: modem, router, hub, base unit, PC.  
If you cannot access Internet Web pages using your PC,  
check to see if your phone system is having connection  
issues in your area.  
Check the VoIP status in the Web user interface and  
confirm that each line is registered properly (® see To  
this section).  
Even when one line fails to register, the indicator will flash  
in amber.  
Check that the SIP server address, URLs of the  
configuration files, encryption key, and other required  
settings are correct.  
Check the firewall and port forwarding settings on the  
router (® see 1.1.10 Other Network Settings).  
For details about settings, consult your network  
administrator or phone system dealer.  
Unplug the unit’s AC adaptor to reset the unit, then  
reconnect the AC adaptor. If the STATUS indicator or  
indicator is still flashing in amber rapidly, there may be  
a problem with the base unit hardware. Contact your phone  
system dealer.  
The STATUS indicator or  
flashes in amber rapidly although the IP  
address was acquired.  
indicator  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
217  
7.1 Troubleshooting  
Problem  
The STATUS indicator or  
lights in amber although the Ethernet cable  
is connected properly.  
Cause/Solution  
The unit’s IP address may conflict with the IP addresses of  
other devices on your local network. Check the unit’s static  
IP address:  
indicator  
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in  
English alphabet  
Base unit (KX-TGP550 only):  
[MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][5][0][1]  
Handset:  
[MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][5][0][1]  
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in  
symbols/pictures  
Base unit (KX-TGP550 only):  
(middle soft key) ® [#][5][0][1]  
Handset:  
(center of joystick) ® [#][5][0][1]  
Then check the IP addresses of the other devices on your  
local network. If necessary, change the unit’s static IP  
address.  
218  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
7.1 Troubleshooting  
Making/Answering Calls, Intercom  
Problem  
Cause/Solution  
The handset does not ring.  
The ringer volume is turned off. Adjust the ringer volume.  
For details about the operations, refer to the User Guide  
on the Panasonic Web site (® see Introduction).  
Check the VoIP status in the Web user interface and  
confirm that each line is registered properly (® see To  
this section).  
Check that the SIP server address, URLs of the  
configuration files, encryption key, and other required  
settings are correct.  
Check the firewall and port forwarding settings on the  
router (® see 1.1.10 Other Network Settings).  
Check [Multi Number Settings] in the [Telephone] tab in  
the Web user interface (® see 3.7.1 Multi Number  
Check [Call Control] for each line in the [Telephone] tab  
in the Web user interface.  
If [Do Not Disturb] is set to [Yes], the base unit or  
handset does not receive calls (® see 3.7.3.3 Call  
If [Unconditional (Enable Call Forward)] is set to  
[Yes], the base unit or handset does not receive calls  
If [Block Anonymous Call] is set to [Yes], the base  
unit or handset does not receive anonymous calls (®  
Check that [Do Not Disturb], [Enable Call Forward], and  
[Block Anonymous Call] are not controlled by your phone  
system.  
If 3 calls are being handled by the base unit and/or  
handsets simultaneously, a new call cannot be received  
and the unit will not ring.  
For details about settings, consult your network  
administrator or phone system dealer.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
219  
7.1 Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Cause/Solution  
The base unit (KX-TGP550 only) does not  
ring.  
The ringer volume is turned off. Adjust the ringer volume.  
For details about the operations, refer to the User Guide  
on the Panasonic Web site (® see Introduction).  
Check the VoIP status in the Web user interface and  
confirm that each line is registered properly (® see To  
this section).  
Check that the SIP server address, URLs of the  
configuration files, encryption key, and other required  
settings are correct.  
Check the firewall and port forwarding settings on the  
router (® see 1.1.10 Other Network Settings).  
Check [Multi Number Settings] in the [Telephone] tab in  
the Web user interface (® see 3.7.1 Multi Number  
Check [Call Control] for each line in the [Telephone] tab  
in the Web user interface.  
If [Do Not Disturb] is set to [Yes], the base unit or  
handset does not receive calls (® see 3.7.3.3 Call  
If [Unconditional (Enable Call Forward)] is set to  
[Yes], the base unit or handset does not receive calls  
If [Block Anonymous Call] is set to [Yes], the base  
unit or handset does not receive anonymous calls (®  
Check that [Do Not Disturb], [Enable Call Forward], and  
[Block Anonymous Call] are not controlled by your phone  
system.  
If 3 calls are being handled by the base unit and/or  
handsets simultaneously, a new call cannot be received  
and the unit will not ring.  
For details about settings, consult your network  
administrator or phone system dealer.  
220  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
7.1 Troubleshooting  
Problem  
I cannot make a call.  
Cause/Solution  
Check if the STATUS indicator or  
green. If it is not lit in green, refer to the User Guide on the  
Panasonic Web site (® see Introduction).  
You cannot make a call while the base unit is downloading  
the firmware update. Wait until the STATUS indicator or  
indicator stops flashing and changes to steady green.  
indicator is lit in  
The handset is too far from the base unit. Move closer and  
try again.  
Check the VoIP status in the Web user interface and  
confirm that each line is registered properly (® see To  
this section).  
Check that the SIP server address, URLs of the  
configuration files, encryption key, and other required  
settings are correct.  
Check the firewall and port forwarding settings on the  
router (® see 1.1.10 Other Network Settings).  
Check [Multi Number Settings] in the [Telephone] tab in  
the Web user interface (® see 3.7.1 Multi Number  
If 3 calls are being handled by the base unit and/or  
handsets simultaneously, a new call cannot be made from  
the unit.  
For details about settings, consult your network  
administrator or phone system dealer.  
Password for Web User Interface Programming  
Problem  
Cause/Solution  
I have lost the login password of the Web  
user interface for the Administrator or User  
account.  
Reset the password from the base unit or one of the  
handsets. The passwords for both Administrator and User  
will be reset (® see 2.1.6 Reset Web ID/Password).  
For security reasons, it is recommended that the  
passwords are set again immediately (® see  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
221  
7.1 Troubleshooting  
Time  
Problem  
The time is not correct.  
Cause/Solution  
Adjust the date and time of the unit. For details about the  
operations, refer to the User Guide on the Panasonic Web  
site (® see Introduction).  
In the Web user interface, you can set NTP  
synchronization and DST (Summer Time) control to adjust  
the time automatically (® see 3.5.5 Time Adjust  
If the time is still incorrect even after setting NTP  
synchronization, check the firewall and port forwarding  
settings on the router (® see 1.1.10 Other Network  
Checking the Status of the Unit  
You can check the status of the unit by using Web user interface programming (® see 3.3.2 Network  
Status and 3.3.3 VoIP Status) or by looking at system logs (® see 4.3.3 Syslog Settings) sent from the  
unit.  
To check the setting status in the Web user interface  
1. Click the [Status] tab, and then click [Network Status] to check the network settings.  
2. Check the status displayed.  
3. Click [VoIP Status] to check the VoIP settings.  
4. Check the status displayed.  
To send the system logs of specified events to the syslog server  
1. Set the following parameters to specify your PC (Windows, Linux® operating system, etc.) as the syslog  
server:  
SYSLOG_ADDR: Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the syslog server.  
SYSLOG_PORT: Specifies the port number of the syslog server.  
2. Set the following parameters to log specific events:  
SYSLOG_EVENT_SIP*1: Logs SIP-related syslog events.  
SYSLOG_EVENT_CFG*1: Logs syslog events regarding configuration.  
SYSLOG_EVENT_VOIP*1: Logs syslog events regarding VoIP operation.  
SYSLOG_EVENT_TEL*1: Logs syslog events regarding telephone functions.  
*1  
In this version of the unit, this system log will not be sent.  
222  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
           
Section 8  
Configuration File Examples  
This section provides examples of the configuration  
files.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
223  
   
8.1 Simplified Example of the Configuration File  
8.1 Simplified Example of the Configuration File  
The following listing shows an example of a simple configuration file.  
For the programming instructions and allowable characters, see 4.2 General Information on the  
Simplified Example  
# PCC Standard Format File # DO NOT CHANGE THIS LINE!  
# This is a simplified sample configuration file.  
############################################################  
# Configuration Setting #  
############################################################  
# URL of this configuration file  
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH="http://config.example.com/0123456789AB.cfg"  
############################################################  
# SIP Settings #  
# Suffix "_1" indicates this parameter is for "line 1". #  
############################################################  
# IP Address or FQDN of SIP registrar server, proxy server  
SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_1="registrar.example.com"  
SIP_PRXY_ADDR_1="proxy.example.com"  
# IP Address or FQDN of SIP presence server  
SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_1="presenceserver.example.com"  
# Enables DNS SRV lookup  
SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_1="Y"  
# ID, password for SIP authentication  
SIP_AUTHID_1="SIP_User"  
SIP_PASS_1="SIP_Password"  
# Some Timer Settings #  
# Expiration time of SIP registration; "1 hour"  
REG_EXPIRE_TIME_1="3600"  
# Disables SIP Session Timer (RFC 4028)  
SIP_SESSION_TIME_1="0"  
# SIP phone number  
PHONE_NUMBER_1="1234567890"  
# Caller ID passed to opposite party  
DISPLAY_NAME_1="1234567890"  
############################################################  
# VoIP Setting #  
############################################################  
# DTMF will be sent through SDP, according to RFC 2833  
224  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
   
8.2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File  
OUTBANDDTMF_1="Y"  
############################################################  
# Call Control Settings #  
############################################################  
# Enables subscription to the Voice Mail server  
VM_SUBSCRIBE_ENABLE="Y"  
# Shared Call Settings  
SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_1="Y"  
SHARED_USER_ID_1="1234567890a"  
# Disables Do Not Disturb, Call Forward synchronization.  
SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_1="N"  
8.2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration  
File  
The following listing shows an example of a comprehensive configuration file. In this example, settings with  
the same values as the default settings are also shown. If the setting already has the desired value, changing  
or specifying a value is unnecessary, and the setting can be omitted.  
Comprehensive Example  
# PCC Standard Format File # DO NOT CHANGE THIS LINE!  
############################################################  
# This is a sample configuration file. #  
# Most of the parameters below are just default values... #  
############################################################  
############################################################  
# System Settings #  
############################################################  
## Login Account Settings  
ADMIN_ID="Jones"  
ADMIN_PASS="HCeDUg4GqqDF9Jpl"  
USER_ID="Smith"  
USER_PASS="lhQ8B5hqoHgOlaAu"  
## System Time Settings  
TIME_ZONE="-300"  
DST_ENABLE="Y"  
DST_OFFSET="60"  
DST_START_MONTH="3"  
DST_START_ORDINAL_DAY="2"  
DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK="0"  
DST_START_TIME="120"  
DST_STOP_MONTH="11"  
DST_STOP_ORDINAL_DAY="1"  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
225  
   
8.2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File  
DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK="0"  
DST_STOP_TIME="120"  
## Syslog Settings  
SYSLOG_EVENT_SIP="0"  
SYSLOG_EVENT_CFG="0"  
SYSLOG_EVENT_VOIP="0"  
SYSLOG_EVENT_TEL="0"  
SYSLOG_ADDR="logserver.example.com"  
SYSLOG_PORT="514"  
SYSLOG_RTPSMLY_INTVL_1="20"  
## Firmware Update Settings  
FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE="Y"  
# FIRM_VER_EUDECT # not needed for US-DECT phone  
FIRM_VER_USDECT="01.01"  
FIRM_UPGRADE_AUTO="Y"  
FIRM_FILE_PATH="http://firmserver.example.com/{MODEL}.fw"  
## Provisioning Settings  
OPTION66_ENABLE="Y"  
PROVISION_ENABLE="Y"  
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH="http://provisioning.example.com/Config{mac}.cfg"  
CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH=""  
CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH="http://provisioning.example.com/ConfigCommon.cfg"  
# CFG_FILE_KEY1="" # Not to overwrite factory default key  
CFG_FILE_KEY2=""  
CFG_FILE_KEY3=""  
CFG_FILE_KEY_LENGTH="128"  
CFG_CYCLIC="N"  
CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL="10080"  
CFG_RTRY_INTVL="30"  
CFG_RESYNC_TIME=""  
CFG_RESYNC_FROM_SIP="check-sync"  
############################################################  
# Network Settings #  
############################################################  
## IP Settings  
CONNECTION_TYPE="1"  
HOST_NAME="TGP550"  
DHCP_DNS_ENABLE="N"  
STATIC_IP_ADDRESS=""  
STATIC_SUBNET=""  
STATIC_GATEWAY=""  
USER_DNS1_ADDR=""  
USER_DNS2_ADDR=""  
## DNS Settings  
DNS_QRY_PRLL="Y"  
DNS_PRIORITY="N"  
DNS1_ADDR=""  
DNS2_ADDR=""  
## Ethernet Port Settings  
226  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
8.2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File  
VLAN_ENABLE="N"  
VLAN_ID_IP_PHONE="2"  
VLAN_PRI_IP_PHONE="7"  
VLAN_ID_PC="1"  
VLAN_PRI_PC="0"  
## HTTP Settings  
HTTP_VER="1"  
HTTP_USER_AGENT="Panasonic_{MODEL}/{fwver} ({mac})"  
HTTP_SSL_VERIFY="0"  
CFG_ROOT_CERTIFICATE_PATH=""  
## Time Adjust Settings  
NTP_ADDR="ntp.example.com"  
TIME_SYNC_INTVL="60"  
TIME_QUERY_INTVL="43200"  
## STUN Settings  
STUN_SERV_ADDR="stun.example.com"  
STUN_SERV_PORT="3478"  
STUN_2NDSERV_ADDR=""  
STUN_2NDSERV_PORT="3478"  
## Miscellaneous Network Settings  
NW_SETTING_ENABLE="Y"  
CUSTOM_WEB_PAGE="0"  
############################################################  
# Telephone Settings #  
############################################################  
## Call Control Settings  
CONFERENCE_SERVER_ADDRESS="[email protected]"  
EMERGENCY_CALL1="911"  
EMERGENCY_CALL2=""  
EMERGENCY_CALL3=""  
EMERGENCY_CALL4=""  
EMERGENCY_CALL5=""  
FIRSTDIGIT_TIM="30"  
INTDIGIT_TIM="5"  
VM_SUBSCRIBE_ENABLE="Y"  
## Tone Settings  
DIAL_TONE_FRQ="350,440"  
DIAL_TONE_TIMING="0,0,0,0"  
BUSY_TONE_FRQ="480,620"  
BUSY_TONE_TIMING="500,500,500,500"  
RINGING_TONE_FRQ="440,480"  
RINGING_TONE_TIMING="2000,4000,2000,4000"  
STT_TONE_FRQ="350,440"  
STT_TONE_TIMING="100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,  
100,100,100,100,100,0,0"  
REORDER_TONE_FRQ="480,620"  
REORDER_TONE_TIMING="250,250,250,250,250,250,250,250"  
HOWLER_TONE_FRQ="1400,2060"  
HOWLER_TONE_TIMING="100,100,100,100"  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
227  
8.2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File  
HOWLER_START_TIME="30"  
BELL_CORE_PATTERN1_TIMING="2000,4000"  
BELL_CORE_PATTERN2_TIMING="800,400,800,4000"  
BELL_CORE_PATTERN3_TIMING="400,200,400,200,800,4000"  
BELL_CORE_PATTERN4_TIMING="300,200,1000,200,300,4000"  
BELL_CORE_PATTERN5_TIMING="500"  
############################################################  
# VoIP Settings #  
############################################################  
## Codec Settings  
SDP_CODEC0_1="G722"  
SDP_CODEC1_1="PCMA"  
SDP_CODEC2_1="G726-32"  
SDP_CODEC3_1="G729A"  
SDP_CODEC4_1="PCMU"  
SDP_CKRTE0_1="8000"  
SDP_CKRTE1_1="8000"  
SDP_CKRTE2_1="8000"  
SDP_CKRTE3_1="8000"  
SDP_CKRTE4_1="8000"  
SDP_PARAM0_1="0"  
SDP_PARAM1_1="0"  
SDP_PARAM2_1="0"  
SDP_PARAM3_1="0"  
SDP_PARAM4_1="0"  
SDP_PTYPE0_1="9"  
SDP_PTYPE1_1="8"  
SDP_PTYPE2_1="2"  
SDP_PTYPE3_1="18"  
SDP_PTYPE4_1="0"  
CODEC_G711_REQ="1"  
CODEC_G729_PARAM="0"  
## RTP Settings  
TOS_RTP_1="0"  
RTCP_INTVL_1="0"  
MAX_DELAY_1="20"  
MIN_DELAY_1="2"  
NOM_DELAY_1="2"  
RTP_PORT_MIN="16000"  
RTP_PORT_MAX="20000"  
RTP_PTIME="20"  
## Miscellaneous VoIP Settings  
OUTBANDDTMF_1="Y"  
TELEVENT_PTYPE_1="101"  
RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_1="Y"  
############################################################  
# Line Settings #  
############################################################  
## Call Control Settings  
VM_NUMBER_1=""  
228  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
8.2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File  
DIAL_PLAN_1="<:0111>[2-9]xxxxxxxxxS0|<:011>1[2-9]xxxxxxxxxS0"  
DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_1="N"  
SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_1="Y"  
SHARED_USER_ID_1="1234567890a"  
SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_1="N"  
PRIVACY_MODE_1="Y"  
## SIP Settings  
SIP_USER_AGENT="Panasonic_{MODEL}/{fwver} ({mac})"  
SIP_AUTHID_1="SIP1234567890"  
SIP_PASS_1="APDs8S2ja0afAMO72"  
SIP_SRC_PORT_1="5060"  
SIP_PRXY_ADDR_1="proxy.example.com"  
SIP_PRXY_PORT_1="5060"  
SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_1="registrar.example.com"  
SIP_RGSTR_PORT_1="5060"  
SIP_SVCDOMAIN_1="example.com"  
REG_EXPIRE_TIME_1="3600"  
REG_INTERVAL_RATE_1="90"  
SIP_SESSION_TIME_1="0"  
TOS_SIP_1="0"  
SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR_1=""  
SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_1="5060"  
SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_1=""  
SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_1="5060"  
SIP_TIMER_T1_1="500"  
SIP_TIMER_T2_1="4"  
INVITE_RTXN_1="6"  
OTHER_RTXN_1="10"  
SIP_FOVR_NORSP_1="N"  
SIP_FOVR_MAX_1="2"  
SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_1="N"  
SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_1="_sip._udp."  
SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_1="_sip._tcp."  
SIP_100REL_ENABLE_1="N"  
SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_1="0"  
SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_1="presenceserver.example.com"  
SIP_PRSNC_PORT_1="5060"  
SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_1=""  
SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_1="5060"  
USE_DEL_REG_OPEN_1="N"  
USE_DEL_REG_CLOSE_1="N"  
PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_1="0"  
SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_1="3600"  
SUB_RTX_INTVL_1="10"  
REG_RTX_INTVL_1="10"  
SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_1="N"  
SIP_PRIVACY_1="N"  
ADD_USER_PHONE_1="N"  
SDP_USER_ID_1="-"  
SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_1="90"  
SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_1=""  
SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_1="5060"  
SIP_TRANSPORT_1="0"  
SIP_ANM_DISPNAME_1="1"  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
229  
8.2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File  
SIP_ANM_USERNAME_1="0"  
SIP_ANM_HOSTNAME_1="N"  
SIP_DETECT_SSAF_1="N"  
PHONE_NUMBER_1="1234567890"  
DISPLAY_NAME_1="1234567890"  
INTERNATIONAL_ACCESS_CODE=""  
#----------------------------------------------------------#  
# Settings for line 2 #  
#----------------------------------------------------------#  
############################################################  
# System Settings #  
############################################################  
## Syslog Settings  
SYSLOG_RTPSMLY_INTVL_2="20"  
############################################################  
# VoIP Settings #  
############################################################  
## Codec Settings  
SDP_CODEC0_2="G722"  
SDP_CODEC1_2="PCMA"  
SDP_CODEC2_2="G726-32"  
SDP_CODEC3_2="G729A"  
SDP_CODEC4_2="PCMU"  
SDP_CKRTE0_2="8000"  
SDP_CKRTE1_2="8000"  
SDP_CKRTE2_2="8000"  
SDP_CKRTE3_2="8000"  
SDP_CKRTE4_2="8000"  
SDP_PARAM0_2="0"  
SDP_PARAM1_2="0"  
SDP_PARAM2_2="0"  
SDP_PARAM3_2="0"  
SDP_PARAM4_2="0"  
SDP_PTYPE0_2="9"  
SDP_PTYPE1_2="8"  
SDP_PTYPE2_2="2"  
SDP_PTYPE3_2="18"  
SDP_PTYPE4_2="0"  
## RTP Settings  
TOS_RTP_2="0"  
RTCP_INTVL_2="0"  
MAX_DELAY_2="20"  
MIN_DELAY_2="2"  
NOM_DELAY_2="2"  
## Miscellaneous VoIP Settings  
OUTBANDDTMF_2="Y"  
TELEVENT_PTYPE_2="101"  
RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_2="Y"  
############################################################  
230  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
8.2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File  
# Line Settings #  
############################################################  
## Call Control Settings  
VM_NUMBER_2=""  
DIAL_PLAN_2="<:0111>[2-9]xxxxxxxxxS0|<:011>1[2-9]xxxxxxxxxS0"  
DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_2="N"  
SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_2="Y"  
SHARED_USER_ID_2="1234567891a"  
SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_2="N"  
PRIVACY_MODE_2="Y"  
## SIP Settings  
SIP_AUTHID_2="SIP1234567891"  
SIP_PASS_2="J8uajAHFK3AHFSAla"  
SIP_SRC_PORT_2="5070"  
SIP_PRXY_ADDR_2="proxy.example.com"  
SIP_PRXY_PORT_2="5060"  
SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_2="registrar.example.com"  
SIP_RGSTR_PORT_2="5060"  
SIP_SVCDOMAIN_2="example.com"  
REG_EXPIRE_TIME_2="3600"  
REG_INTERVAL_RATE_2="90"  
SIP_SESSION_TIME_2="0"  
TOS_SIP_2="0"  
SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR_2=""  
SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_2="5060"  
SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_2=""  
SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_2="5060"  
SIP_TIMER_T1_2="500"  
SIP_TIMER_T2_2="4"  
INVITE_RTXN_2="6"  
OTHER_RTXN_2="10"  
SIP_FOVR_NORSP_2="N"  
SIP_FOVR_MAX_2="2"  
SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_2="N"  
SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_2="_sip._udp."  
SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_2="_sip._tcp."  
SIP_100REL_ENABLE_2="N"  
SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_2="0"  
SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_2="presenceserver.example.com"  
SIP_PRSNC_PORT_2="5060"  
SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_2=""  
SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_2="5060"  
USE_DEL_REG_OPEN_2="N"  
USE_DEL_REG_CLOSE_2="N"  
PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_2="0"  
SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_2="3600"  
SUB_RTX_INTVL_2="10"  
REG_RTX_INTVL_2="10"  
SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_2="N"  
SIP_PRIVACY_2="N"  
ADD_USER_PHONE_2="N"  
SDP_USER_ID_2="-"  
SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_2="90"  
SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_2=""  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
231  
8.2.1 Codec Settings for G729A only  
SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_2="5060"  
SIP_TRANSPORT_2="0"  
SIP_ANM_DISPNAME_2="1"  
SIP_ANM_USERNAME_2="0"  
SIP_ANM_HOSTNAME_2="N"  
SIP_DETECT_SSAF_2="N"  
PHONE_NUMBER_2="1234567891"  
DISPLAY_NAME_2="1234567891"  
#----------------------------------------------------------#  
# Settings for line 3 to 8 follows... #  
#----------------------------------------------------------#  
8.2.1 Codec Settings for G729A only  
By specifying the configuration parameters as shown in the following example, you can use only "G729A" for  
line 1 as the codec settings.  
Example  
SDP_CODEC0_1="G729A"  
SDP_CODEC1_1=""  
SDP_CODEC2_1=""  
SDP_CODEC3_1=""  
SDP_CODEC4_1=""  
SDP_PTYPE0_1="18"  
SDP_PTYPE1_1="255"  
SDP_PTYPE2_1="255"  
SDP_PTYPE3_1="255"  
SDP_PTYPE4_1="255"  
CODEC_G711_REQ="0"  
Note  
If you use only "G729A" for lines 2–8, specify the same settings by changing the suffix "_1"  
to "_2"–"_8".  
This listing shows the parameters required for setting "G729A" only. For details about the other settings,  
232  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
   
8.3 Example with Incorrect Descriptions  
8.3 Example with Incorrect Descriptions  
The following listing shows an example of a configuration file that contains incorrect formatting:  
An improper description is entered in the first line. A configuration file must start with the designated  
character sequence "# PCC Standard Format File #".  
Comment lines start in the middle of the lines.  
Space characters are inserted in the middle of the setting line.  
Comment lines begin with characters other than "#".  
A specified value is not in the range allowed for that setting.  
Incorrect Example  
A
# This is a simplified sample configuration file.  
############################################################  
# Configuration Setting #  
############################################################  
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH="http://config.example.com/0123456789AB.cfg"  
# URL of this configuration file  
############################################################  
# SIP Settings #  
B
# Suffix "_1" indicates this parameter is for "line 1". #  
############################################################  
SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_1="registrar.example.com" # IP Address or FQDN of SIP registrar server  
SIP_PRXY_ADDR_1="proxy.example.com"  
# IP Address or FQDN of proxy server  
# Enables DNS SRV lookup  
SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_1="Y"  
# ID, password for SIP authentication  
SIP_AUTHID_1 = "SIP_User"  
C
SIP_PASS_1 = "SIP_Password"  
# Some Timer Settings #  
# Expiration time of SIP registration; "1 hour"  
REG_EXPIRE_TIME_1="3600"  
# Disables SIP Session Timer (RFC 4028)  
SIP_SESSION_TIME_1="0"  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
233  
   
8.3 Example with Incorrect Descriptions  
// SIP phone number  
PHONE_NUMBER_1="1234567890"  
# Caller ID passed to opposite party  
DISPLAY_NAME_1="1234567890"  
D
/*  
* VoIP Setting  
*/  
# DTMF will be sent through SDP, according to RFC 2833  
OUTBANDDTMF_1="Y"  
############################################################  
# Call Control Settings #  
############################################################  
# Enables subscription to the Voice Mail server  
VM_SUBSCRIBE_ENABLE="Yes"  
E
# Shared Call Settings  
SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_1="Y"  
SHARED_USER_ID_1="1234567890a"  
# Disables Do Not Disturb, Call Forward synchronization.  
SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_1="N"  
234  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Section 9  
Open Source Software  
Parts of this product use Open Source Software.  
Relevant conditions apply to this software. Panasonic  
cannot accept inquiries regarding the content of the  
following copyright and licence information.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
235  
 
<<NetBSD kernel>>  
This product uses a part of NetBSD kernel.  
The use of a part of NetBSD kernel is based on the typical BSD style  
license below.  
Copyright (c)  
The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without  
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions  
are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright  
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright  
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the  
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software  
must display the following acknowledgement:  
This product includes software developed by the University of  
California, Berkeley and its contributors.  
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors  
may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software  
without specific prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND  
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE  
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS  
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)  
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT  
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY  
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF  
SUCH DAMAGE.  
However, parts of the NetBSD Kernel are provided with the following copyright notices.  
Copyright (c) 1980, 1983, 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1980, 1986, 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1980, 1986, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1980, 1986, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1985, 1986, 1988, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1993, 1994, 1995 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1993, 1995 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1988, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1988, 1993, 1995 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1989, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1995 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1993, 1994, 1995 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1993, 1995 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1988, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1983, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1985, 1986, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1985, 1986, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1986, 1989, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
236  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Copyright (c) 1986, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1987, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1987, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1987, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1988 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved  
Copyright (c) 1988 Stephen Deering.  
Copyright (c) 1988 University of Utah.  
Copyright (c) 1988, 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1988, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1988, 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1989 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1989, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1989, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1990, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1991, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1992 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1993 Adam Glass  
Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1994 Gordon W. Ross  
Copyright (c) 1994 Winning Strategies, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1995 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 1997, and 1998 WIDE Project. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1996 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1996 John S. Dyson All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1996 Matt Thomas. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1996 Matthew R. Green. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1996 Paul Kranenburg  
Copyright (c) 1996, 1997, 1999, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1996, 2000 Christopher G. Demetriou. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1996,1999 by Internet Software Consortium.  
Copyright (c) 1996-1999 by Internet Software Consortium.  
Copyright (c) 1997 Jonathan Stone and Jason R. Thorpe. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1997 Christos Zoulas. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1997 Manuel Bouyer. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1997, 1998 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2002 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1997, 1998, 2000, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1997, 1998, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1997,98 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (C) 1997-2000 Sony Computer Science Laboratories Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1997-2002 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1998 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1998 Todd C. Miller <To[email protected]> All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1998, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1998, 2000, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1999 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (C) 1999 WIDE Project. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1999, 2000 Jason L. Wright ([email protected]) All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1999, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1999, 2000, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1999, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 2000, 2001, 2002 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 2002 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
237  
Copyright 1998 Massachusetts Institute of Technology. All rights reserved.  
Copyright 2001 Wasabi Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Portions Copyright (c) 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation.  
Portions Copyright (c) 1995 by International Business Machines, Inc.  
Copyright (c) 1983, 1989 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1996 by Internet Software Consortium. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1980, 1986, 1989 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1988 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1994 Christopher G. Demetriou. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1997 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1999 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1996 Gardner Buchanan <[email protected]> All rights reserved.  
Parts of the NetBSD Kernel are provided with the licenses that are slightly different from the  
above Berkeley-formed license. Please refer the source code of the NetBSD Kernel about the details.  
The source code of the NetBSD Kernel is provided by the NetBSD CVS Repositories  
(http://cvsweb.netbsd.org/bsdweb.cgi/), and this product includes parts of the source code in the  
following directories.  
http://cvsweb.netbsd.org/bsdweb.cgi/src/sys/kern/  
http://cvsweb.netbsd.org/bsdweb.cgi/src/sys/net/  
http://cvsweb.netbsd.org/bsdweb.cgi/src/sys/netinet/  
<<OpenSSL>>  
The product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project and it is used  
under the following license.  
LICENSE ISSUES  
==============  
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of  
the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit.  
See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style  
Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL  
please contact [email protected].  
OpenSSL License  
---------------  
/* ====================================================================  
* Copyright (c) 1998-2004 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.  
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without  
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions  
* are met:  
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright  
*
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright  
*
*
*
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in  
the documentation and/or other materials provided with the  
distribution.  
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this  
*
*
*
*
software must display the following acknowledgment:  
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project  
for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"  
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to  
*
*
*
*
endorse or promote products derived from this software without  
prior written permission. For written permission, please contact  
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"  
*
nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written  
238  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
*
*
permission of the OpenSSL Project.  
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following  
*
*
*
*
acknowledgment:  
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project  
for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"  
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY  
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE  
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR  
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,  
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT  
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;  
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)  
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,  
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)  
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED  
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
* ====================================================================  
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young  
* ([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim  
* Hudson ([email protected]).  
*
*/  
Original SSLeay License  
-----------------------  
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected])  
* All rights reserved.  
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written  
* by Eric Young ([email protected]).  
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.  
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as  
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions  
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,  
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation  
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms  
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).  
*
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in  
* the code are not to be removed.  
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution  
* as the author of the parts of the library used.  
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or  
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.  
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without  
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions  
* are met:  
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright  
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright  
*
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the  
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software  
*
*
*
*
*
must display the following acknowledgement:  
"This product includes cryptographic software written by  
Eric Young ([email protected])"  
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library  
being used are not cryptographic related :-).  
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from  
the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:  
*
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
239  
*
*
"This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])"  
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND  
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE  
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE  
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE  
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS  
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)  
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT  
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY  
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF  
* SUCH DAMAGE.  
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or  
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be  
* copied and put under another distribution licence  
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]  
*/  
<<MD5>>  
This software uses the Source Code of RSA Data Security, Inc. described in the  
RFC1321 (MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm).  
-----------------------------------------------------------------  
Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All  
rights reserved.  
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it  
is identified as the "RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest  
Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing this software  
or this function.  
License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided  
that such works are identified as "derived from the RSA Data  
Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material  
mentioning or referencing the derived work.  
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either  
the merchantability of this software or the suitability of this  
software for any particular purpose. It is provided "as is"  
without express or implied warranty of any kind.  
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this  
documentation and/or software.  
-----------------------------------------------------------------  
<<MT19937>>  
The MT19937 software that Takuji Nishimura and Makoto Matsumoto developed  
is contained, and this product shall be used subject to the following  
license conditions.  
Copyright (C) 1997 - 2002, Makoto Matsumoto and Takuji Nishimura,  
All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without  
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions  
are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright  
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright  
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the  
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. The names of its contributors may not be used to endorse or promote  
products derived from this software without specific prior written  
240  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS  
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT  
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR  
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR  
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,  
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,  
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR  
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF  
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING  
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS  
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
<<thttpd>>  
The thttpd software that ACME Labs developed is contained, and this product  
shall be used subject to the following license conditions.  
Copyright 1995,1998,1999,2000 by Jef Poskanzer <[email protected]>.  
All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without  
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions  
are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright  
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright  
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the  
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND  
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE  
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS  
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)  
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT  
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY  
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF  
SUCH DAMAGE.  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
241  
242  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Index  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
243  
 
Index  
Channel 1–3 72  
Numerics  
Characters Available for String Values 134  
A
CODEC_G729_PARAM 169  
Comprehensive Example 225  
Conference Server Address 102  
CONFERENCE_SERVER_ADDRESS 161  
Configuration File 21, 132  
Access Levels (IDs and Passwords) 27, 50  
ADD_USER_PHONE_[1–8] 192  
Configuration File Examples 223  
Configuration File Parameter List 126  
Configuration File Parameters 133  
Configuration File Programming 125  
Configuration File Specifications 132  
Configuration Parameter Example 212  
Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit 15  
Confirm New Password 74, 75  
Connection Mode 59, 62  
Controls on the Window 52  
Administrator Password 74  
Authentication Password 86  
Available Values for the Dial Plan Field 207  
B
Block Anonymous Call 107  
Busy (Enable Call Forward) 109  
Busy (Phone Number) 110  
D
Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time) 78  
DHCP_DNS_ENABLE 151  
C
Dial Plan Example 208  
Dial Plan Settings 206  
DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_[1–8] 176  
Display Name 104  
Call Control 101, 102, 104  
Call Control Settings 128, 130, 161, 175, 207  
Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match 107  
Call Hold 95, 174  
Call Rejection Phone Numbers 103  
DNS_QRY_PRLL 153  
DNS1_ADDR 154  
DNS2_ADDR 154  
Domain Name Server 63  
DST Offset (Summer Time Offset) 78  
CFG_ROOT_CERTIFICATE_PATH 158  
Change Administrator Password 74  
Change User Password 75  
DST_OFFSET 136  
244  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Index  
DST_STOP_TIME 139  
Grouping Handset/Handset selection for receiving calls 99  
H
Handset and Line No. selection for making calls 100  
Header Value for Resync Event 122  
E
Embedded web 49  
Emergency Call Phone Numbers 103  
EMERGENCY_CALL[1–5] 161  
Enable DNS SRV lookup 86  
Enable DST (Enable Summer Time) 78  
Enable Firmware Update 118  
Enable Global IP Address Usage per Line 72  
Enable Privacy Mode 104  
Enable Provisioning 120  
Enable Shared Call 105  
I
Enable Synchronization by NTP 77  
End Day and Time of DST (End Day and Time of Summer  
INTDIGIT_TIM 162  
Entering Characters 53  
Export Phonebook 117, 202  
F
J
K
Firmware Maintenance 118, 212  
Firmware Update Settings 126, 141, 212  
FIRSTDIGIT_TIM 162  
L
Language 73  
Language Selection 14, 27, 28, 73  
Language Selection for the Unit 14  
Line 1–Line 8 72  
Link Speed/Duplex Mode 65  
G
Global Address Detection 30, 70  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
245  
Index  
Local Firmware Update 119, 213  
Login Account Settings 126, 134  
Phone User Interface Feature List and Direct  
Phone User Interface Programming 17, 28, 33, 34  
PHONE_NUMBER_[1–8] 195  
Phonebook Data in Binary Format 202  
PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_[1–8] 190  
Pre-provisioning 17  
M
Maintenance 47  
Maintenance Tab 47, 118  
Master Configuration File 22, 121, 146  
Presence Server Address 84  
Minimum Delay 94  
Product Configuration File 22, 121, 145  
Miscellaneous Network Settings 128, 160  
Miscellaneous VoIP Settings 130, 174  
Provisioning 17, 21  
Provisioning Maintenance 23, 120  
Provisioning Server 20, 24  
Provisioning Settings 23, 127, 143  
N
Q
No Answer (Enable Call Forward) 110  
No Answer (Phone Number) 111  
No Answer (Ring Count) 111  
R
Recommended Environment 48  
Registrar Server Address 83  
Related Documentation  
Reliability of Provisional Responses 89, 188  
O
Opening/Closing the Web Port 48  
RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_[1–8] 174  
Ringing Tone 113  
RINGING_TONE_TIMING 164  
Overview of Programming 17  
P
RTP (Real-time Transport Protocol) Setup 30  
Phone Number 60, 83, 99  
246  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Index  
S
SDP_CODEC[0–4]_[1–8] 167  
SDP_USER_ID_[1–8] 192  
Secondary DNS Server 15, 60, 63, 65, 153, 154  
Secure Provisioning Methods 25  
Speed/Duplex 34, 65  
Speed/Duplex Settings 34  
Standard Configuration File 22, 121, 144  
Standard File URL 121  
Start Day and Time of DST (Start Day and Time of Summer  
Send SUBSCRIBE to Voice Mail Server 102  
Service Domain 85  
Shared Call 105, 176  
SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_[1–8] 176  
SHARED_USER_ID_[1–8] 177  
Simplified Example 224  
STATIC_GATEWAY 152  
STT_TONE_FRQ 164  
STT_TONE_TIMING 164  
SIP_100REL_ENABLE_[1–8] 188  
SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR_[1–8] 183  
SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_[1–8] 189  
SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_[1–8] 189  
SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_[1–8] 184  
SIP_ANM_USERNAME_[1–8] 194  
SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_[1–8] 186  
SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_[1–8] 191  
STUN_2NDSERV_ADDR 159  
STUN_SERV_ADDR 159  
Supports 100rel (RFC 3262) 89  
Supports Session Timer (RFC 4028) 90  
Synchronization 77  
Synchronization Interval 77  
Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward 106  
SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_[1–8] 188  
SIP_PRXY_ADDR_[1–8] 179  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
247  
Index  
Voice Mail Access Number 105  
T
Tab-separated Value (TSV) 116, 117, 201, 203  
TCP/IP Settings (DHCP or Static IP Address  
Technical Support  
Telephone 45  
W
Telephone Settings 128, 161  
Telephone Tab 45, 98  
Telephone-event Payload Type 95  
Web Language 27, 73  
Terminal Number Settings 37  
TFTP Server 17, 19, 143  
Web User Interface Programming 17, 27, 39  
TIME_ZONE 136  
Tone Frequencies 112, 113, 114, 115  
Troubleshooting 215  
TSV ® Tab-separated Value 116, 117, 201, 203  
U
Unconditional (Enable Call Forward) 108  
Unique ID of Shared Call 106  
USE_DEL_REG_CLOSE_[1–8] 190  
USE_DEL_REG_OPEN_[1–8] 189  
USER_DNS1_ADDR 153  
USER_DNS2_ADDR 153  
Using 2 Types of Configuration Files 22  
Using 3 Types of Configuration Files 21  
V
248  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Notes  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
249  
Notes  
250  
Administrator Guide  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Notes  
Document Version 2010.03.15  
Administrator Guide  
251  
Copyright:  
This material is copyrighted by Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for internal  
use only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic  
System Networks Co., Ltd.  
© Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd. 2009  
PNQX2113VA YM0709YS4030  

IBM 4900 User Manual
JVC AV 21VT31 User Manual
Kreisen KR 370T User Manual
Life is good Monitor N1910LZ BF User Manual
Medion MD 80137 User Manual
Miele KM 5860 User Manual
NCR Computer Hardware 7401 User Manual
Palsonic 6827G User Manual
Philips 29PT5322 User Manual
Philips 29PT8867 User Manual